JP7404036B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that can play games.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is fired into a game area by a firing device, and when the game ball enters a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There are things that can be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as "fluctuation") of identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of identification information on the variable display device becomes a specific display result, the gaming state (game There are machines (so-called pachinko machines) that are configured to give a predetermined gaming value to the player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is controlled).

Note that gaming value refers to the state of the variable winning ball device installed in the gaming area of the gaming machine that is advantageous to the player who is likely to hit a winning ball, or the state that is advantageous to the player. This means that rights are generated, and that the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily established.

In a pachinko game machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole. A “jackpot” occurs when the Note that the derivation display means to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a jackpot occurs, for example, a jackpot opening is opened a predetermined number of times and the game enters a jackpot game state in which it is easy to hit a winning ball. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prizes are won in the big winning hole, the big winning hole is closed. The number of times the big prize opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). Note that an opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the grand prize opening will be closed when the opening time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big prize opening may be referred to as a round. Moreover, a game in a round is sometimes called a round game.

In addition, in the variable display device, a symbol other than the final stop symbol (for example, the center symbol among the left center right symbols) is stopped and shaken continuously for a predetermined period of time in a state that matches a specific display result. The jackpot may occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, scaling, or deformation, or multiple symbols are changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. A performance performed in a state where sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called a reach performance. In addition, the reach state and its appearance are called the reach mode. Furthermore, a variable display that includes a reach effect is referred to as a variable reach display. Then, if the display result of the symbols variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes a "miss" and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying finding out how to generate a jackpot.

Among such gaming machines, there is known a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of a variable display. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses that, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a special gaming state is controlled from a normal state to a special gaming state in which a specific display result is more likely to be derived and displayed than in the normal state without going through the specific gaming state. It is stated that the game is controlled.

Unexamined Japanese Patent Publication No. 2015-80649 (Figure 21, etc.)

However, conventional gaming machines have room for further improvement.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably execute effects.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
The specific display result includes a first specific display result and a second specific display result different from the first specific display result,
sound output means;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
a variable means capable of controlling a first state in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter;
Equipped with
The variable means can be controlled to the first state by different control patterns when the first specific display result is derived and displayed and when the second specific display result is derived and displayed,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state;
The display means includes a first display area and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area,
The specific performance is
The display means displays a performance video, the sound output means outputs performance sound, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is announced as a performance result. including,
The performance execution means is
In the first display area, the effect video can be displayed,
In the second display area, information regarding the game can be displayed;
In the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed in the first display area,
In the second period,
The information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area,
After displaying the effect video progressing at the second speed, it is possible to perform a still effect of displaying a still image of the effect video,
There are multiple production modes of the static production,
Depending on which presentation mode the static presentation is, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs,
The performance execution means is
The information display can be displayed in an operative manner,
Continuing the information display operation even during the execution of the static performance,
In the third period,
When notifying an advantageous aspect as a performance result, the first display area and the second display area are used to inform the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period. It is possible to notify the performance results in an advantageous manner,
When notifying a disadvantageous aspect as a performance result, the first display area is used to notify the disadvantageous performance result while the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period is displayed. It is possible and
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means may be emitted at shorter intervals than in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode.
Gaming machines according to other aspects include:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) being derived and displayed,
State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, step 090IWS462 and step 090IWS468 in the game control microcomputer 100 (part to be executed) and
It has a special area (e.g., V prize opening) and is controlled into a first state (e.g., open state) in which game media can easily enter and a second state (e.g., closed state) in which game media cannot enter or it is difficult to enter. Possible variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 090IW17),
Variable control means (for example, the part shown in FIG. 8-6) for controlling the variable means,
A production execution means capable of executing production (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion of the production control CPU 120 that executes step S76),
When a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is displayed, the variable means can be controlled to the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-5, the variable means can be controlled to the first state, the part that executes step S118 in the microcomputer 100),
The special display results include a first special display result (for example, a display result that results in a small win A or B) and a second special display result that is different from the first special display result (for example, a small win C). (display results);
The state control means includes:
In the normal state, if the game medium does not pass through the special area when the first special display result (for example, the display result of small win A or small win B) is derived and displayed, the special state is entered. control (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, the part that executes the process of step 090IWS462 when Y in step 090IWS461a in the game control microcomputer 100, and the process of step 090IWS468 when Y in step 090IWS467a),
In the normal state, if the game medium does not pass through the special area when the second special display result (for example, the display result of small win C) is derived and displayed, the control to the special state is not performed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, when step 090IWS467 in the game control microcomputer 100 is N, the processing of step 090IWS461a and step 090IWS462, step 090IWS467a and step 090IWS468 is not executed),
The ease with which the game medium passes through the special area differs between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6). (part shown),
The variable control means can control the variable means to the first state using different control patterns when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. (For example, the part shown in Figure 8-6).
According to such a configuration, when the special display result is derived and displayed, it is possible to suitably perform an effect as to whether or not to control the special state.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in characteristic part 090IW. It is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a special variable winning ball device in characteristic part 090IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. in the characteristic part 090IW. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table and a small hit determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table and a small hit type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of a small winning game. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 090IW. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 090IW. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing in the characteristic part 090IW. It is a flowchart showing starting winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal. It is a flowchart which shows small hit release preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit release. It is a flowchart which shows small hit closure post-processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows advance notice setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a look-ahead preview performance determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a look-ahead preview performance determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a look-ahead preview performance determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode when a small hit occurs. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode when a small hit occurs. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modification of the opening pattern of the small winning game. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode when a small hit occurs. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode when a small hit occurs. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modification of the opening pattern of the small winning game. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing rotating display of a hold display in each hold display area, and (C) is a diagram showing moving display of a subtitle in a subtitle display area. , (D) is a diagram showing the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of a chance up effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns for still image display performance, and (B) is a diagram showing the performance contents of each performance pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns of operation promotion performance, and (B) is a diagram showing the performance contents of each performance pattern. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)3. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 1st reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 1st reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 3rd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 3rd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production in a modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the gaming area), a variable display (also referred to as a special game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible displays that correspond to variable displays.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. Accordingly, the first pending memory number is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second pending memory number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", will be returned to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 This may be done by turning on/off the light, moving the movable body 32, etc.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), as well as backup flag states and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to send the production control command to the production control board 12 to specify the determination results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and the pre-read judgment. . The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a determined special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a loss symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is a "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., a determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance control process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios may be "0%" and the other ratio may be "100%" or a ratio less than "100%."

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 090IW)
Next, the characteristic part 090IW of this embodiment will be explained. In this feature section 090IW, the gaming state is controlled to be either a normal state (non-time saving state) or a time saving state. As will be described in detail later, it is possible to control from the normal state to the time saving state via the small winning game state based on the small winning symbols being derived and displayed. In addition, the display result of a small win includes a display result of a small win A or a small win B that can be controlled in a time-saving state, and a display result that is a small win C that cannot be controlled in a time-saving state. Then, a case where a variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a display result resulting in a small hit is derived and displayed, and a case where a variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a display result resulting in a small hit is derived and displayed. The ratio at which the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed differs.

In this example, in the time saving state, the average special symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, the average regular symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state. The probability of winning a ``Puzu'' in the ``Puzu'' game increases. For example, in the normal state, the probability of hitting a common symbol is 10%, but in the time saving state, the probability of hitting a common symbol is increased to 90%, and a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting prize opening). It becomes easier to do. In addition, not only in such an aspect, but for example, in the time saving state, by lengthening the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B compared to the normal state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) can be opened. It may be configured so that it is easier for game balls to win prizes.

In addition, in this example, in the time saving state, the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, but as will be described later, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit probability is increased. Since the structure is set, the time saving state is a state that is easily controlled to a small winning game state.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic part 090IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 090IW, in the game area, the first path of the flowing paths along which the game ball flows is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, A second path different from the first path among the downstream paths along which the balls flow down is mainly provided in an area on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting the game ball into the left side area (left side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is called left-handed hitting. Hitting the game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is called right-handed hitting. The first route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball to the left side of the game area, so it may be called a left-handed route. Further, the second route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area, so it may be called a right-handed route.

Note that the first route and the second route may be configured as different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left gaming area and the right gaming area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the gaming nails within the gaming area.

When the game ball that is fired from the ball launcher and hit into the game area in response to the operation of the ball operation handle 30 is guided to the left game area, it is guided, for example, along the array of game nails. Therefore, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide the player to the right gaming area. Further, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area because it is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example.

A winning ball device 6A constituting a first starting winning opening is provided as a structure into which the game balls that have been distributed can enter the left gaming area of the gaming area.

The structures that allow the game balls that are divided into the right game area of the game area to enter include a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B that constitutes a second starting winning opening, and a special variable winning opening that constitutes a special winning opening. A ball device 090IW17 and a special variable winning ball device 7 that constitutes a big winning hole are provided.

In the left gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the winning ball device 6A of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to cause a game ball to enter the winning ball device 6A, the player only has to hit the game ball to the left. In addition, in the right gaming area, game nails are placed so that game balls are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B, passage gate 41, special variable winning ball device 090IW17, and special variable winning ball device 7 among the winning opening structures. It is planted. Therefore, when aiming to cause a game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 6B, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17, and the special variable winning ball device 7, the player should hit the game ball to the right. good.

It should be noted that it may be possible to make it possible for the game balls that are distributed to the right game area to enter the winning ball device 6A, but from the viewpoint of playability, this possibility is lower than the possibility that the game balls that are distributed to the left game area enter the winning ball device 6A. It is desirable that they be extremely low compared to the probability that a ball will enter them. Conversely, it may be possible to allow the game balls that have been hit in the left game area to enter the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, but from the perspective of playability, this possibility is limited to the right side. It is desirable to make the probability extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls that are divided into the game areas will enter them.

The special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is a device for determining the V winning of game balls, which is a condition for generating a jackpot when a small hit occurs. By moving the bottom member 090IW17a, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 has a first state in which the game ball can easily win (an open state in which the bottom member 090IW17a is moved backwards) and a state in which the game ball cannot enter or It is possible to control the second state (closed state in which the bottom member 090IW17a is moved forward) into which it is difficult to enter. In addition, when a small winning symbol different from the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 can be controlled to the open state.

In this example, it is possible to control the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the V winning hole which is a special area. Furthermore, the ease with which the game ball passes through the V winning hole differs between when the display result of small win A or B is derived and displayed and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed. As will be described later, when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole, while the display result of small win C is difficult. When the lead-out display is displayed, it is easy for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole. Then, when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, there are differences when the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is in the open state. It is possible to perform the performance.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 8-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 in this feature section 090IW. As shown in FIG. 8-2, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 090IW17a that is formed as the bottom of the channel through which the game balls flow, and in the small winning game state, the bottom member 090IW17a By moving the bottom member 090IW17a backward from the closed state in which it is moved forward forward, the special winning opening which becomes the winning area is brought into the open state. The game ball that has won (in other words, entered) the special winning opening is detected by the special winning opening switch 090IW24.

In addition, in this example, when a game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) and is detected by the count switch 23, 15 winning balls are obtained, whereas the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) receives 15 winning balls. When a game ball enters the ball device 090IW17 (special winning hole) and is detected by the special winning hole switch 090IW24, three prize balls are obtained.

Further, the bottom member 090IW17a is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 090IW83 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

In this characteristic part 090IW, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the game balls that have won in the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 (special winning hole) are further routed through a guidance path provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 090IW17. Guided to 090IW01. The guide route 090IW01 further branches into two routes 090IW02 and 03, and the game ball guided along the guide route 090IW01 is guided to the left route 090IW02 or the right route 090IW03. The left path 090IW02 is a V winning hole, and the game ball that enters the V winning hole is detected by the V winning hole switch 090IW20a. In addition, game balls that have passed through the right path 090IW03, that is, game balls that have not entered the V winning port, are detected by the non-V winning port switch 090IW20b.

As shown in Figure 8-2, a V winning opening opening/closing plate 090IW20 is provided near the entrance of the left route 090IW02 (V winning opening), and when the V winning opening opening/closing plate 090IW20 is in the open state, the guidance The game ball guided to the path 090IW01 enters the left path 090IW02 (V winning hole), and the V winning hole is possible. Further, when the V winning opening opening/closing plate 090IW20 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guide path 090IW01 enters the right path 090IW03 and is discharged to the back side of the game area.

In addition, the V winning a prize opening opening/closing board 090IW20 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 090IW84 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

In addition, in this characteristic part 090IW, when the small winning gaming state is controlled, the game ball enters the V winning opening 090IW02 during the small winning gaming state and is detected by the V winning opening switch 090IW20A, on the condition that, After the end of the small winning game, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

Furthermore, in this characteristic part 090IW, when the small winning A or small winning B occurs and the small winning gaming state is controlled, the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 090IW02 during the small winning gaming state and the non-V On the condition that it is detected by the winning opening switch 090IW20b, it is controlled to the time saving state after the small winning game ends. On the other hand, when the small win C occurs and the small win gaming state is controlled, even if the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 090IW02 during the small winning gaming state and is detected by the non-V winning opening switch 090IW20b. , the time saving state is not controlled after the small winning game ends.

In other words, in the case of small hit A or small hit B, if the game ball that entered the special winning hole does not win a V prize (if it does not pass through the V winning hole), it will be controlled to shorten the time. , in the case of a small hit C, even if the game ball that entered the special winning hole does not win a V prize (if it does not pass through the V winning hole), the time saving state is not controlled. However, in the case of a small win A or B, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to be in the open state so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning hole 090IW02 during the small winning game state, In the case of a small win C, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to be in the open state so that the game ball can easily enter the V winning hole 090IW02 during the small winning game state. Therefore, in the case of a small hit A or B, it is easy to control the time saving state, but it is almost impossible to control the machine to a jackpot state, whereas in the case of a small win A or B. Although it is impossible to control the time saving state, it is easy to control the jackpot state.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is formed with a plurality of regulating pieces that reduce the speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom member 090IW17a. In this example, the regulating piece is provided in the special variable winning ball device 090IW17, so that the downward direction of the game ball can be controlled so that the game ball flowing down from the upper right to the lower left meander with the movement of the front and back component. change so that the time it takes for its flow to flow is slower than it would be without the restriction piece.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-2, in the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 (special winning opening), a special winning opening switch 090IW24 is provided on the upstream side, and a V winning opening and a discharge opening are installed on the downstream side. Although the case is shown in which the V winning a prize opening switch 090IW20A is provided on the V winning a prize mouth side by branching into the V winning a prize mouth side, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the upstream side of the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 (special winning opening) is branched into the V winning opening side and the general winning opening side, and the V winning opening switch 090IW20A is provided on the V winning opening side, and the general It may be configured such that a special winning opening switch 090IW24 is provided on the winning opening side.

(Substrate configuration)
FIG. 8-3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the feature section 090IW. As shown in FIG. 8-3, in this characteristic part 090IW, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 090IW021, a starting port switch (first starting port switch 22A and a second starting port switch 22B), a count switch 090IW023, and a special winning port. Detection signals from the switch 090IW24 and the V winning a prize opening switch 090IW20a (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, solenoid 82, solenoid 090IW83, and solenoid 090IW84) from the game control microcomputer 100, and converts it to the solenoid 81 for ordinary electric accessories or the big prize. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 for the opening door (special variable winning ball device 7), the solenoid 090IW83 for the special variable winning ball device 090IW17, and the solenoid 090IW84 for the V winning opening opening/closing plate 090IW20.

(Jackpot determination table and small hit determination table)
FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table and a small hit determination table. Of these, FIG. 8-4(A) shows an example of the jackpot determination table. In this example, as shown in Figure 8-4, the probability is approximately 1/200 whether the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It was decided that it would be a jackpot.

FIG. 8-4(B) shows an example of a small hit determination table when performing a variable display of the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-4(C) shows an example of a small hit determination table when performing a variable display of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 8-4(B), in this example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is determined that a small hit will occur with a probability of about 1/500. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4(C), in this example, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the probability of a small hit is about 1/7.

(Jackpot type determination table, small hit type determination table)
FIGS. 8-5(A) and 8-5(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 8-5(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-5(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 8-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This table is referred to in order to determine the type of jackpot as "10R time-saving jackpot".

As shown in Figure 8-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result will be a jackpot symbol. This table is referred to in order to determine the type of jackpot as "10R time-saving jackpot".

The "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to be in a jackpot gaming state for 10 rounds, and then shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Once you enter the time saving state, the time saving state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 8-5(A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and results in a jackpot, it is determined that the 10R time-saving jackpot has a 100% probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a jackpot is achieved, it is determined that the 10R time-saving jackpot is achieved with a 100% probability.

Note that the jackpot type is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example. For example, you can provide multiple types of time-saving jackpots with different numbers of time-savings (for example, 3 or 5 rounds), or provide multiple types of time-saving jackpots with different numbers of rounds (for example, 2 rounds or 4 rounds). good. In addition, this example shows a case where only a time-saving jackpot that shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends is provided, but it is also possible to provide a non-time-saving jackpot (normal jackpot) that does not shift to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends. may be configured. In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a 100% probability that a 100R time-saving jackpot is determined, but if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Even in the case of a game, it may be configured such that a plurality of types of jackpots are determined.

FIG. 8-5(C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in Figure 8-5 (C), the small hit type determination table determines the small hit based on the random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result will be used as a small win symbol. This table is referred to in order to determine the type as either "small win A", "small win B", or "small win C".

"Small hit A" means that the game ball that entered the special winning hole during the small winning game (first round) did not win a V prize (detected by the non-V winning hole switch 090IW20b, and the V winning hole was disabled). This is a small win that transitions to a time saving state after the small win game ends, on the condition that a pass has been detected. Once the time saving state is entered, the time saving state is maintained until the 10 times of variable display is completed. Note that "Small win A" is a small win that controls the jackpot game state of the second to fourth rounds on the condition that a V prize is won, and shifts to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. However, when it becomes "small hit A", the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled so as not to win a V prize.

"Small hit B" means that the game ball that entered the special winning hole during the small winning game (first round) did not win a V prize (it was detected by the non-V winning hole switch 090IW20b, and the V winning hole was disabled). This is a small win that transitions to a time saving state after the small win game ends on the condition that the pass has been detected. Once the time saving state is entered, the time saving state is maintained until the variable display is completed five times. In addition, "Small win B" is a small win that controls the jackpot game state of the second to fourth rounds on the condition that a V prize is won, and shifts to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. However, when it becomes "small hit B", an opening pattern is controlled to open the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 so as not to win a V prize.

"Small hit C" means that the game ball that entered the special winning hole during the small winning game (first round) did not win a V prize (detected by the non-V winning hole switch 090IW20b, and did not pass through the V winning hole) This is a small win that does not shift to the time-saving state after the small win game ends. In addition, "Small win C" is a small win that controls the jackpot game state of the second to fourth rounds on the condition that a V prize is won, and shifts to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. Then, when the "small win C" is reached, the opening pattern for opening the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled so that a V winning occurs in most cases.

As shown in Figure 8-5(C), in this example, 25% of the cases where the first special symbol is displayed as a small hit and result in a small hit are determined to be "small hit A"; A "small hit B" is determined, and 50% is determined as a "small hit C."

As shown in Figure 8-5 (D), in this example, 5% of the cases where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and results in a small hit are determined as "small hit A", and 5% are A "small hit B" is determined, and 90% is determined as a "small hit C."

In addition, the small hit type is not limited to the aspect shown in this example. For example, a plurality of types of time-saving jackpots with different number of time-saving wins (for example, 3 or 5 times) may be provided. Further, it may be configured to provide a small win without a V win, in which it is virtually impossible to win a V prize during a small win game, and there is no transition to a jackpot game after the small win game.

Also, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a small hit is higher than when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, so when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , the probability of a small hit A or B (that is, a small hit with time saving) is higher, but when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit with time saving is 100%. You can hit it.

(Opening pattern for small winning games)
Next, the opening pattern of the small winning game will be explained. FIG. 8-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small winning game. As shown in FIG. 8-6, after starting the small winning game at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to the open state at timing S2.

As shown in Figure 8-6 (A), in the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction), when the V winning opening opening/closing plate 090IW20 is controlled to the closed state, a special 0.05 second After opening the variable winning ball device 090IW17 (special winning hole), after a 1 second closing time, the special winning hole is opened and closed again for 0.05 seconds, and after a 12 second closing time, the special winning hole is opened in the same way. It opens and closes twice.

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-6 (B), in the case of small win C (no time saving), when the V winning opening opening/closing plate 090IW20 is controlled in the open state, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 (special winning ball device 090IW17) By repeating the operation of opening the special winning hole for 0.05 seconds, closing the special winning hole for 1 second, and then opening the special winning hole for 0.05 seconds so that the opening (opening) is controlled in the open state, the special winning hole is opened once. A special prize opening will be opened 10 times with a small hit.

In addition, the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing board 090IW20 is the same for small win A or small win B (with time reduction) and small win C (no time reduction), and it is opened for 8 seconds in both cases. .

In addition, in this example, the opening time of each special winning hole in the small hit is extremely short, 0.05 seconds, but as already explained, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is formed with a plurality of regulating pieces. In addition, on the bottom member 090IW17a of the special variable winning ball device 090IW17, about 2 to 3 game balls are flowing down while meandering, so even if the opening time is short, if the bottom member 090IW17a is controlled to be in the open state, The game ball on the bottom member 090IW17a can fall and enter the special variable winning ball device 090IW17.

In the case of small win C (no time saving), the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 will be in the open state when the V winning opening opening/closing plate 090IW20 is in the open state, so the game ball will be placed in the V winning opening. Is possible. In addition, in the case of small hit A or B (with time saving), when the V winning opening opening/closing plate 090IW20 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is in the open state, so the game ball is placed in the V winning opening. It is impossible or difficult to win a prize.

In the case of small hit C (no time saving), if the game ball that enters the special winning hole does not pass through the V winning hole, the time saving state will not be controlled, but small hit A or B (with time saving) When the game ball enters the special winning hole and the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole, the time saving state is controlled. As a result, when there is a small hit C (no time saving), there is a high possibility that the game ball will pass through the V winning hole and be controlled to the jackpot state, but it will not be controlled to the time saving state, and the small winning A or B (With time saving), there is a very low possibility that the game ball will be controlled to a jackpot state without passing through the V winning hole, but there is a high possibility that it will be controlled to a time saving state.

Then, if the game ball enters the special winning hole and wins a V prize, after the last opening of the special winning hole is completed, a predetermined period of closing time (interval time) and small winning end time (ending time) have elapsed. , the game enters the jackpot game state, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state from the second round to the fourth round.

In addition, in both cases of small hit A or B (with time reduction) and small hit C (no time reduction), the ending period shifts from timing S3 to S4, but the small hit A or B (with time reduction) shifts to the ending period from timing S3 to S4. The ending period t3 in the case of ) is longer than the ending period t4 in the case of the small hit C (no time saving). For example, the ending period t3 is 10 seconds longer than the ending period t4. As a result, in the case of small win A or B (with time saving), it is possible to secure time to display the start screen of the time saving state (see FIG. 8-30 (N)).

In addition, in the case of small hit A or B (with time saving), the ending period may be changed depending on whether or not the game ball has won in the V winning hole (that is, whether or not to shift to the time saving state). Specifically, when the game ball does not enter the V winning hole, the time is controlled to be shortened, so in this case, the ending period is lengthened.

In this way, in this example, when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, the pattern is different (in this example, the pattern is It is possible to control the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 to the open state depending on the number of times). Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the time saving state.

Specifically, in this example, the V win performs a common operation when the display result of small win A or B is derived and displayed and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed. Equipped with a mouth opening/closing plate 090IW20, when the display result of small hit A or small winning B is derived and displayed, when the V winning opening/closing plate 090IW20 is in a state of obstructing the passage of game balls to the V winning opening. When the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to the open state and the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, the V winning hole opening/closing plate 090IW20 is in a state that does not obstruct the passage of game balls to the V winning hole. When the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the time saving state.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIG. 8-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 090IW. Among these, FIG. 8-7 shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for the first special symbol. Moreover, FIG. 8-8 shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for the second special symbol.

First, the variation pattern of the first special symbol will be explained using FIG. 8-7. As shown in FIG. 8-7, in this example, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, if the first special symbol is out of order during the normal state, the variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), Variation pattern PA1-2 (non-reach in normal variation → development effect), variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA1-4 (non-reach in shortened variation → development effect), variation pattern PA2-1 ( Normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (normal reach→development effect), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach β). In addition, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, if it misses during the time saving state, the variable pattern PA1-5 (shortening variation), the variation pattern PA1-6 (non-shortening variation), Reach → development effect), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (normal reach → development effect), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach β) Determined by

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-7, in this example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern PB1-1 (normal reach) is used as the variable pattern. , variation pattern PB1-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PB1-3 (super reach β). In addition, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, if a jackpot occurs during the time saving state, the variable patterns are variable pattern PB1-1 (normal reach), variable pattern PB1-2 (super reach α), variable pattern PB1-2 (super reach α), One of patterns PB1-3 (super reach β) is determined.

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-7, in this example, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, if a small hit C (no time saving) occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern is displayed as a variable pattern. It is determined to be one of PC1-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PC1-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PC1-3 (super reach β). In addition, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, if a small hit C occurs during the time saving state, the variable patterns are variable pattern PC1-1 (normal reach), variable pattern PC1-2 (super reach α). , variation pattern PC1-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-7, in this example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, if the small hit A or B (with time saving) occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern is Decided to be either variation pattern PC1-4 (normal variation non-reach → development performance), variation pattern PC1-5 (shortened variation non-reach → development performance), variation pattern PC1-7 (normal reach → development performance) be done. In addition, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, if the small hit A or B (with time saving) occurs during the time saving state, the variation pattern PC1-6 (non-reach in shortening variation → Development performance), variation pattern PC1-7 (normal reach → development performance) is determined.

Next, the variation pattern of the second special symbol will be explained using FIG. 8-8. As shown in FIG. 8-8, in this example, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if the change occurs during the normal state, the variable patterns PA3-1, PA3- 2 (non-reach with normal fluctuation → development performance) is determined. In addition, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it misses during the time saving state, the variable pattern PA3-3 (shortening variation), the variation pattern PA3-4 (non-shortening variation), Reach → development effect), variation pattern PB3-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PB3-2 (normal reach → development effect), variation pattern PB3-3 (super reach α,) variation pattern PB3-4 (super reach β) Determined by

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-8, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern PA3-5 (normal reach) is determined as the variable pattern. . In addition, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if a jackpot occurs during the time saving state, the variable patterns are variable pattern PC3-1 (normal reach), variable pattern PC3-2 (super reach α), variable pattern PC3-2 (super reach α), variable pattern One of the patterns PC3-3 (super reach β) is determined.

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-8, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if the small hit A to C occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern PA3-6 (normal reach) is used as the variable pattern. determined. In addition, when a small hit C occurs during the time saving state, the following fluctuation patterns are available: fluctuation pattern PD3-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PD3-2 (super reach α), and fluctuation pattern PD3-3 (super reach β). It will be decided either way.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-8, in this example, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if the small hit A or B (with time saving) occurs during the time saving state, the variation pattern is as follows: Either the variation pattern PD3-4 (non-reach in shortened variation → development performance) or the variation pattern PD3-5 (normal reach → development performance) is determined.

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process processing (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (ordinary symbol hit), and based on the determination result, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (ordinary symbol hit). Control is performed to execute the variable display, but in this example, in the normal state, it is decided that the probability of hitting a normal figure is 10%, and in the case of the time saving state, the probability is 90%. We decide to hit the normal map based on the probability. In addition, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) to be in an open state based on the determination that the normal symbol has been won in the normal symbol process process (step S26).

In this way, in this example, when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed, the specific effect is changed during variable display. The rate at which development effects are executed differs. Specifically, in the case of a small win A or B, a pasting effect is performed, but in the case of a small win C, an extended effect is not performed. Therefore, inconsistency between the pre-read preview performance and the performance after the jackpot game state or the time-saving state can be avoided, so that the pre-read preview performance can be suitably executed.

In addition, in the case of small hit A or small hit B (with time saving), a common variation pattern may be provided for small hit C (without time saving), loss or jackpot.

(Production control command)
FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command sent to the production control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIGS. 8-9, command 80XX(H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. It is. Note that the performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, upon receiving any of the commands 80XX(H), the production control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 9001 (H) is a performance control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a loss.

Command 9002 (H) is a performance control command (display result 2 designation command (10R time-saving jackpot designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols specified by the variable pattern command is a 10R time-saving jackpot. Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 3 designation command (small win A designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is small hit A. .Command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 specification command (small hit B specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be small hit B. Yes. Command 9005 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 specification command (small hit C specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is small hit C. It is.

Command A000 (H) is a performance control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot start specification command: fanfare specification command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game. Command B001 (H) is a production control command (jackpot end specification command: ending specification command) that specifies the end of the jackpot game.

Command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (big winning opening display command) that specifies the display during a round during the jackpot game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX". Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (display command after opening of the jackpot opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the jackpot game.

Command B300 (H) is a performance control command (small win start designation command) that specifies the start of a small win game. Command B301 (H) is a performance control command (small win A end designation command) that specifies the end of the small win game of small win A. Command B302 (H) is a performance control command (small win B end designation command) that specifies the end of the small win B game. Command B303 (H) is a performance control command (small win C end designation command) that specifies the end of the small win C small win game.

Command B400 (H) is a performance control command (big winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won in the big winning opening. Command B401 (H) is a performance control command (special winning opening designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening. Command B402 (H) is a performance control command (V winning hole winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won a prize in the V winning hole in the special winning hole. Command B403 (H) is a production control command (non-V winning designation command) that specifies that the game ball that entered the special winning hole did not enter the V winning hole (did not pass through the V winning hole). ).

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first pending memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first pending memory number is increased by one. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second pending memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second pending memory number is increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first pending memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first pending memory number is decreased by one. Command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second pending memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second pending memory number is decreased by one.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XX (H) is a performance control command ( (design designation command). In addition, the command C6XX(H) is an effect control command (variation category command) that indicates the determination result of the fluctuation pattern or the type of fluctuation pattern among the winning determination results.

Command E000(H) is an effect control command (normal background designation command) that designates the background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time-saving background designation command) that specifies the background display when the gaming state is the time-saving state.

When the production control CPU 120 (specifically, production control CPU 120) mounted on the production control board 12 receives the production control command described above from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the content shown in 8-9, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is outputted to the audio control board 13. Note that production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 8-9 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, a more detailed performance control command regarding the jackpot game and a performance control command indicating the game state (for example, a performance control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

In addition, in this example, the presence or absence of the time saving state and the number of time saving times can be identified depending on whether the small win A end designation command, the small win B end designation command, or the small win C end designation command is used. Whether or not a winning occurred in the V winning hole due to the game ball that entered the special winning hole; in other words, whether or not a winning occurred in the V winning hole by the game ball that entered the special winning hole;

(That is, whether or not to control to the time saving state) by transmitting a small winning end designation command corresponding to whether or not to control to the time saving state.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 8-10 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing in the feature section 090IW. In this example, the starting winning determination process (step 090IWS101) is almost the same as the starting winning determining process (step S101) shown in FIG. Further, the special symbol normal processing (step 090IWS110) to special symbol stop processing (step 090IWS113) are generally similar to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) to special symbol stop processing (step S113) shown in FIG. However, in this example, when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed, the process moves to small winning release preprocessing (step 090IWS114). Further, when a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed (so-called direct hit), the process moves to jackpot release preprocessing (step 090IWS117).

Small hit release preprocessing (step 090IWS114): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The game control microcomputer 100 executes the process of controlling the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 to the open state, and changes the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) to the small hit opening process (step 090IWS115) to a value (5 in this example).

Small hit opening process (step 090 IWS115): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. If the opening time elapses while the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is open, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to the closed state, and if the closing time elapses while the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is closed and it is still open. If the number of times remains, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to be in an open state. In addition, when it is the timing to open the V winning opening opening/closing plate 090IW20, the V winning opening opening/closing plate 090IW20 is controlled to be in the open state, and when it is the timing to close the V winning opening opening/closing plate 090IW20, the V winning opening opening/closing plate 090IW20 is controlled to open. 090IW20 is controlled to the closed state. In addition, it is confirmed whether the V winning a prize opening switch 090IW20a is turned on or not, and when the V winning a prize opening switch 090IW20a is turned on, a V winning a prize flag is set. When all openings of the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 are completed and the closing time (interval time) has also elapsed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is changed to the value corresponding to the small hit post-closure process (step 090IWS116). In this example, update to 6).

Small hit closing post-processing (step 090 IWS116): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. When the V winning flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step 090 IWS117). If the V winning flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 090 IWS110).

The jackpot release preprocessing (step 090IWS117) to the jackpot end processing (step 090IWS120) are generally the same as the jackpot release preprocessing (step S114) to the jackpot end processing (step S117) shown in FIG.

In addition, in this example, after a jackpot is determined and the jackpot/small win symbol is derived and displayed, or after a V win occurs during a small win game and the small win game ends, the case immediately shifts to the jackpot game. is shown, but is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, instead of immediately transitioning to the jackpot game, the configuration may be such that the transition to the jackpot game is made on the condition that the game ball passes through an operating gate (which may also be used as the passing gate 41) provided in the gaming area. Good too.

(Start winning determination process)
FIG. 8-11 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (step 090IWS101). In the starting winning determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the first starting port switch 22A is in the on state (step 090IWS1211). If the first starting port switch 22A is not in the on state, the process moves to step 090IWS1221. If the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether the number of first pending memories has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first pending memory for counting the number of first pending memories). It is checked whether the value of the number counter is 4 (step 090IWS1212).

If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increases the value of the first pending storage counter by 1 (step 090IWS1213). Further, the CPU 103 increases the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number by 1 (step 090IWS1214). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the counters for generating random numbers such as a random number for determining a hit, a random number for determining a winning type, and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern, and stores them in a storage area in the first reservation storage buffer. (Step 090IWS1215). Note that, in the first pending storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the first pending storage number (4 in this example) is secured and is formed in the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning determination process that determines in advance the fluctuation display result and fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation based on the detected starting winning is subsequently executed at the time of the starting winning (step 090IWS1216). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step 090IWS1217), and performs control to transmit a variable category command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS1217). Step 090IWS1218). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first pending storage number addition designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 090IWS1219). Then, the process moves to step 090IWS1221.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the second starting port switch 22B is in the on state (step 090IWS1221). If the second starting port switch 22B is not in the on state, the process ends. If the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the number of second pending memories has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending memory for counting the number of second pending memories). It is checked whether the value of the number counter is 4 (step 090IWS1222).

If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increases the value of the second pending storage counter by 1 (step 090IWS1223). Further, the CPU 103 increases the value of the total pending storage counter by 1 (step 090IWS1224). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the counters for generating random numbers such as a random number for determining a hit, a random number for determining a winning type, and a random number for determining a variation pattern, and stores them in a storage area in the second holding storage buffer. (Step 090IWS1225). Note that a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the second pending storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second pending storage buffer, and is formed in the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning determination process (step 090IWS1226). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step 090IWS1227), and performs control to transmit a variable category command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS1227). Step 090IWS1228). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number addition designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 090IWS1229). Then, the starting prize winning determination process ends.

(Special design normal processing)
8-12 and FIG. 8-13 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal processing (step 090IWS110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 090IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is checked. If the total number of pending memories is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second number of pending memories is 0 (step 090IWS52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage counter for counting the second pending storage number is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set in (step 090IWS53). If the second pending memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first pending memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 090IWS54).

In this feature section 090IW, by executing the processes of steps 090IWS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in priority to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the aspect shown in this example is not limited, and for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in the order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 090IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = 1 in the first pending memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = 1 in the second pending memory number buffer. and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 090IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending memory number counter, and stores each storage area in the first pending memory number buffer. Shift the contents of . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending memory number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 saves the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total number of pending memories by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 090 IWS57). Note that the CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the production control CPU 120 according to the current gaming state (step 090IWS58). In this case, if the time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is set is set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time-saving background designation command. Further, if the time saving flag is not set, the CPU 103 performs control to send a normal background designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 090IWS61), and executes the jackpot determination module (step 090IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for winning determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step 090IWS101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance to determine the jackpot. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see Figure 8-4 (A)) and a random number for hit determination, and if they match, it is determined to be a jackpot. be. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8-4(A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step 090IWS63), the process moves to step 090IWS64. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be a jackpot (N in step 090IWS63), the process moves to step 090IWS67. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a jackpot means deciding whether to shift to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make a stop symbol on the special symbol display a jackpot symbol. There is also.

In step 090IWS64, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. Then, the CPU 103 determines the type of jackpot (10R time-saving jackpot) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number for determining the winning type stored in the random number buffer area (step 090 IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining the winning type extracted in the starting winning determination process (step 090IWS101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer in advance, and determines the jackpot type. Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 090IWS66). Then, the process moves to step 090IWS73.

On the other hand, in step 090IWS67, the CPU 103 selects the small hit determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer. In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", select the small hit determination table for the first special symbol shown in Figure 8-4 (B), and set the value of the special symbol pointer to If "second" is indicated, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-4(C) is selected. Then, the CPU 103 uses the selected small hit determination table to perform a lottery process based on the random number for hit determination, and determines whether or not to make a small win (step 090 IWS68). In addition, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-4(B) and (C), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of determining a small hit is 0%, and the probability of determining a small hit is 0%. 2. When the variable display of special symbols is executed, a small hit is determined with a probability of about 1/7.

If it is determined to be a small win (Y in step 090IWS69), the CPU 103 sets a small win flag indicating that it is a small win (step 090IWS70). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (small win A, small win B, small win C) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number for determining the hit type stored in the random number buffer area as the small win type (step 090IWS71). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining the winning type extracted in the starting winning determination process (step 090IWS101) and stored in the second pending storage buffer in advance, and determines the small winning type. Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined small win type in the small win type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 090IWS72). Then, the process moves to step 090IWS73.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time saving state is 0 (step 090 IWS73). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (that is, if it is in the time saving state), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 090 IWS74), and the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 after the subtraction. (Step 090IWS75). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the current variation display is the final time saving variation), the CPU 103 indicates that it has been decided to end the time saving state at the end of the current variation. The time saving end determination flag shown is set (step 090IWS76).

In this example, even if the value of the time saving number counter is determined to be 0 in step 090IWS75, at this stage, the time saving end determination flag is simply set, the time saving flag is maintained, and the time saving state is continued. Then, the time saving flag is reset at the timing when the symbols stop, and the time saving state ends (see step 090IWS138c described later). In addition, in the case of a jackpot, only the time saving flag is set at the end of the jackpot, and the time saving number counter is not set. Therefore, in this case, the time saving end determination flag is not set, and the time saving flag is reset the next time a jackpot occurs (see step 090 IWS134). Further, if a jackpot or small hit occurs during the time saving after the small win ends, the time saving flag and the time saving number counter are reset (see steps 090IWS134 and 139a).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 090IWS111) (step 090IWS77).

In addition, in this example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit determination process itself in step 090IWS68 is executed, but the case is shown in which the probability of determining a small hit is 0%. However, it may be configured such that the small hit determination process itself in step 090IWS68 is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide a small hit determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-4(B).

Further, for example, even when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, it may be configured such that a small hit may be determined with an extremely low probability.

In this example, the small hit determination is performed after the jackpot determination, but the jackpot determination may be performed after the small hit determination. In this case, the small hit type may be determined following the small hit determination, or the small hit type may be determined after the jackpot determination is completed.

Further, in this example, the random number for determining the hit type is the same for the jackpot and the small hit, but different random numbers for determining may be used for each. Moreover, without providing a random number for determining the winning type, the small winning determination value may be divided into two or more ranges, and it may be determined whether or not there is a time saving. Further, the number of types of symbols may be one regardless of whether there is a time saving or not. In this case, the process can be made easier by determining whether or not there is a time saving using the small hit determination value instead of using the random number for determining the hit type.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step 090IWS113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 090IWS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 090IWS132). .

The CPU 103 ends the process if the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction has not become 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has not yet ended). do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has yet to be completed), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot flag. Check whether it is set (step 090IWS133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is in effect, and the time-saving frequency counter for counting the number of executions of the fluctuation display during the time-saving state. (Step 090IWS134). Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS135). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the opening of the big winning hole to measure the time before opening the big winning hole (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state (step 090 IWS136). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot start pre-processing (step 090IWS137).

If the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the small win flag is set (step 090IWS138). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is in effect and a time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the fluctuation display during the time saving state. Reset (step 090IWS139a). Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a small hit start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS139b). Next, the CPU 103 sets the special winning opening pre-opening time timer for measuring the special winning opening pre-opening time (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to the open state according to the fanfare time of the small hit. The specified value is set (step 090IWS140). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 090IWS114) (step 090IWS141).

If the small hit flag is not set (that is, if it is a loss), the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving end determination flag is set (step 090IWS138a). If the time saving end determination flag is not set, the process moves to step 090IWS142. If the time-saving end determination flag is set, the time-saving end determination flag is reset (step 090IWS138b), and the time-saving flag is reset (step 090IWS138c). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 090IWS110) (step 090IWS142).

(External output signal)
FIG. 8-15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal externally output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 8-15, in this example, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, and a time saving signal are output as external output signals. Among these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game and during the time saving state. Further, the time saving signal is a signal that is output to the outside during the time saving state.

In this example, in addition to the case where the time saving state is entered at the end of the jackpot game, the time saving state may also be entered when the small hit A or small win B is reached, so the time saving state signal is output externally. Ru. Here, conventionally, the time saving state has been controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state, but the time saving state has never been controlled after the end of the small winning gaming state. Therefore, by outputting the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal to the outside, the number of jackpots and the number of time savings could be accurately identified in external equipment (such as a hall computer or data lamp). However, in this example, the time saving state may be controlled not only after the end of the jackpot gaming state but also after the end of the small winning gaming state, so the external device cannot accurately calculate the number of time saving times with only the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal. There is a possibility that counting will not be possible. Therefore, by outputting the time saving signal as in this example, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the external device cannot accurately count the number of time saving times.

(Small hit release preprocessing)
FIG. 8-16 is a flowchart showing the small win release preprocessing (step 090IWS114) in the special symbol process processing. In the small win pre-opening process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the special winning opening pre-opening timer has timed out (step 090IWS401). If the special winning a prize opening pre-opening time timer has not timed out (that is, if the fanfare time has not elapsed), the process ends as is.

If the special winning opening pre-opening timer has timed out (that is, if the fanfare time has elapsed), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 090IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 to the open state ( Step 090IWS402). Note that the opening pattern differs between the case of small win A or B and the case of small win C (see FIG. 8-6). Further, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the first opening time of the special winning opening (in this example, 0.05 seconds) in the opening time timer (step 090IWS403).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (step 090IWS115) (step 090IWS404).

(Processing during small hit release)
FIG. 8-17 is a flowchart showing the small hit opening process (step 090IWS115) in the special symbol process process. In the small winning opening process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the special winning opening switch 090IW24 is turned on (step 090IWS421). If the special winning opening switch 090IW24 is in the ON state (that is, if winning of a game ball to the special winning opening is detected), the CPU 103 sends a special winning opening winning designation command to the production control CPU 120. Control is performed to transmit (step 090IWS422).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning a prize opening switch 090IW20a is turned on (step 090IWS423). If the V winning opening switch 090IW20a is in the ON state (that is, if winning of a game ball to the V winning opening is detected), the CPU 103 sends a V winning opening winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120. Control is performed to transmit (step 090IWS424). Further, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that a V winning has been won (step 090IWS425).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the non-V winning opening switch 090IW20b is turned on (step 090IWS425a). If the non-V winning opening switch 090IW20b is in the ON state (that is, if it is detected that the game ball that entered the special winning opening did not pass through the V winning opening), the CPU 103 specifies the non-V winning opening. Control is performed to send a command to the production control CPU 120 (step 090IWS425b). Further, the CPU 103 sets a non-V winning flag indicating that the game ball did not win in the V winning opening (step 090IWS425c).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not it is time to open the V winning opening opening/closing board 090IW20 (step 090IWS426). If it is the timing to open the V winning opening opening/closing plate 090IW20, the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 090IW84 and controls the V winning opening opening/closing plate 090IW20 to an open state (step 090IWS427).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether it is time to close the V winning opening opening/closing plate 090IW20 (step 090IWS428). If it is time to close the V winning opening opening/closing plate 090IW20, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 090IW84, and controls the V winning opening opening/closing plate 090IW20 to a closed state (step 090IWS429).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning hole is 0 (step 090IWS430). If the value of the opening time timer is not 0 (that is, if the special winning opening is being opened), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer (step 090IWS431), and the value of the opening time timer after the subtraction is Check whether it is 0 (step 090IWS432). If the value of the open time timer is 0, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 090IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 to be in a closed state (step 090IWS433). Further, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined closing time (a value corresponding to an interval time) to a closing time timer for measuring the closing time after opening the special winning opening (step 090IWS434).Then, the process ends.

If the opening time timer is 0 in step 090IWS430 (that is, if the special winning opening is closed), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the closing time timer (step 090IWS435), and the value of the closing time timer after the subtraction. It is confirmed whether or not is 0 (step 090IWS436). If the value of the closing time timer is 0, the CPU 103 checks whether all the special winning openings have already been opened (step 090IWS437). In this example, if the special winning opening has already been opened four times, it is determined as Y in step 090IWS437, and the process moves to step 090IWS440.

If all of the special winning holes have not been opened (that is, if the second to fourth openings remain), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 090IW83 to keep the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 in the open state. (Step 090IWS438). Further, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the open time (0.05 seconds in this example) in the open time timer (step 090IWS439). Then, the process ends.

If all the special winning openings have been opened (Y in step 090IWS437), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning post-closure process (step 090IWS116) (step 090IWS440). ).

(Processing after small hit closure)
FIG. 8-18 is a flowchart showing the small winning closure post-processing (step 090IWS116) in the special symbol process processing. In the small win closing post-processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the small win end display timer is set (step 090IWS451), and if the small win end display timer is set, the process moves to step 090IWS453. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small hit end display timer to a display corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 090IWS452), and the process ends.

In step 090IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small winning end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the small win end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small win end display time has elapsed (step 090IWS454). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the small winning end display time has elapsed, the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning flag is set (step 090IWS455). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag and the time saving number counter (step 090IWS456). Further, the CPU 103 resets the V winning flag (step 090IWS457). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 090IWS458). Further, the CPU 103 sets a timer for the time before opening the big prize opening (step 090IWS459).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot start pre-processing (step 090IWS117) (step 090IWS460).

When it is confirmed in the process of step 090IWS456 that the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is a small win A (step 090IWS461). In the case of small win A, it is checked whether the non-V winning flag is set (step 090IWS461a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, the process moves to step 090IWS465. If the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag (step 090IWS462). The time saving number counter is set to "10" (step 090IWS463). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a small hit end designation A command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS464). Next, the process moves to step 090IWS465.

Further, when the CPU 103 confirms that the small win is not A (N in step 090IWS461), it checks whether the small win is B (step 090IWS467). In the case of small win B, it is checked whether the non-V winning flag is set (step 090IWS467a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, the process moves to step 090IWS465. If the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag (step 090IWS468). The time saving number counter is set to "5" (step 090IWS469). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the small hit end designation B command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS470). Next, the process moves to step 090IWS465.

Moreover, when the CPU 103 confirms that it is not a small hit B (N in step 090IWS467), it performs control to transmit a small hit end designation C command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS471). Next, the process moves to step 090IWS465.

In step 090IWS465, the CPU 103 resets the small hit flag (step 090IWS465). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a small hit end designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 090IWS462). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 090IWS110) (step 090IWS463).

In addition, a value is set in the timer that measures the ending period after the closing of the small hit depending on whether it is a small hit A or B (with time saving) or small winning C (no time saving), but in case of small hit A. Alternatively, the value is set so that the ending period in the case of B (with time reduction) is longer than the ending period in the case of small hit C (without time reduction).

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the production control means will be explained. FIGS. 8-19 and 8-20 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 090IWS611). Whether the command is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. If both match, the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 090IWS612). Note that after reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 090IWS613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variable pattern command (step 090IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variable pattern command in the variable pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 090IWS615). Then, the variable pattern command reception flag is set (step 090IWS616).

If the received production control command is a display result specification command (step 090IWS617), the production control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 090IWS618). ).

If the received production control command is any of the symbol confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command) (step 090IWS619), the production control CPU 120 responds to the received symbol confirmation designation command. The confirmed command reception flag is set (step 090IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation designation command is received, a second confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received performance control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 090IWS621), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 090IWS622). If the received performance control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 090IWS623), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 090IWS624).

If the received production control command is a large winning slot prize designation command (step 090IWS625), the production control CPU 120 sets a large winning slot prize designation command reception flag (step 090IWS626). If the received production control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 090IWS627), the production control CPU 120 sets a special winning opening winning designation command reception flag (step 090IWS628). If the received production control command is a V winning opening winning designation command (step 090IWS629), the production control CPU 120 sets a V winning opening winning designation command reception flag (step 090IWS630). If the received production control command is a non-V winning designation command (step 090IWS630a), the production control CPU 120 sets a non-V winning designation command reception flag (step 090IWS630b).

If the received production control command is one of the symbol designation commands (step 090IWS631), the production control CPU 120 stores the received symbol designation command in the first available space in the starting winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. (Step 090IWS632).

If the received production control command is any variable category command (step 090IWS633), the production control CPU 120 stores the received variation category command in the storage area of the starting winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. It is stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command is stored (step 090IWS634).

If the received production control command is the first pending memory addition designation command (step 090IWS635), the production control CPU 120 stores the received first pending storage addition designation command in the starting winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. out of the storage areas where the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored (step 090IWS636). Further, the performance control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the first pending storage number stored in the RAM 122 (step 090IWS637). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 updates the first pending memory display (display that allows identification of the first pending memory number) displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the first pending memory number after addition. Step 090IWS638).

If the received production control command is a second pending memory addition designation command (step 090IWS639), the production control CPU 120 stores the received second pending storage addition designation command in the starting winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. out of the storage areas where the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored (step 090IWS640). Further, the performance control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the second pending storage number stored in the RAM 122 (step 090IWS641). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 updates the second pending memory display (display that allows specifying the second pending memory number) displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the second pending memory number after addition ( Step 090IWS642).

By executing the processing of steps 090IWS631 to S642, in this example, when a starting winning occurs, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a pending memory addition designating command (first pending memory addition command) are stored in the starting winning command storage area. The addition designation command and the second pending storage addition designation command) are stored in association with each other.

In addition, it may be configured to separately provide a first starting winning command storage area corresponding to the first pending memory and a second starting winning command storage area corresponding to the second pending storage. In this case, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation category command, and the first pending storage addition designation command are stored in correspondence in the first start winning command storage area, and the symbol designation command is stored in the second start winning command storage area. The configuration may be such that the command, the variable category command, and the second pending storage addition designation command are stored in association with each other.

If the received production control command is the first pending storage subtraction designation command (step 090IWS643), the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the first pending storage number stored in the RAM 122 (step 090IWS644). Further, the performance control CPU 120 updates the first pending storage display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the first pending storage number after the subtraction (step 090IWS645).

If the received production control command is a second pending storage subtraction designation command (step 090IWS646), the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the second pending storage number stored in the RAM 122 (step 090IWS647). Further, the performance control CPU 120 updates the second pending storage display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the second pending storage number after the subtraction (Step 090IWS648).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 executes processing such as storing the received production control command and setting a flag according to the received production control command (step 090IWS649 ). For example, if the received command is a time-saving background designation command, a background image corresponding to the time-saving state is displayed on the image display device 5, and a time-saving state flag indicating the time-saving state is set. Further, for example, if the received command is a normal background designation command, a background image corresponding to the normal state is displayed on the image display device 5, and if it is set, the time saving state flag is reset. Then, the process moves to step 090IWS611.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-21 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 090IWS801). Next, the production control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop) of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read out in step 090IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command). symbol) is determined (step 090IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 090IWS802 by the performance control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stopping of the decorative pattern) is determined according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. In addition, when a pseudo series is specified by the fluctuation pattern command, the production control CPU 120 selects a chance pattern (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo series in step 090IWS802. , combinations of jackpot symbols that do not reach reach and symbols that are off by one symbol) are also determined. Note that the performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop symbols of the determined decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 090IWS802, the production control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

In step 090IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates a "big hit" or "small hit", the performance control CPU 120 determines that the three symbols are the same as the stop symbols. Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit/small hit symbols). Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Further, a combination of three symbols derived and displayed on the image display device 5 is a "stop symbol" which is a decorative symbol.

In addition, although this example shows a case where a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same in both the case of a jackpot and the case of a small win is displayed, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured to display different combinations of decorative symbols in the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit. In this case, for example, in the case of a jackpot, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot symbol) in which three symbols are the same is displayed as confirmed, while in the case of a small win, a combination of decorative symbols such as "135" is displayed. (Small winning symbol) may be displayed as confirmed.

For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbols are determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Regarding the decorative patterns, a stop pattern that reminds you of a jackpot (a combination of patterns whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same pattern) is called a jackpot pattern. Also, a stop symbol that reminds you of a miss is called a miss symbol.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a normal process table according to the variation pattern (step 090IWS803). Then, the process moves to step 090IWS814.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in step 090IWS803 (step 090IWS804).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to by the production control CPU 120 when controlling the production device is set. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls performance devices (performance components) such as the image display device 5 according to process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode that constitutes the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer setting value has a variation time set in the manner of variation. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM in the effect control board 80. Further, process tables are prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, the process table used when executing performance control for a fluctuation pattern that involves a reach performance has a function that stops displaying the left symbol when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and stops displaying the right symbol when a further predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stopping symbols and the temporary stopping symbols in pseudo-runs and sliding effects. It's okay.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is executed (step 090IWS805). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature part 090IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step 090IWS806). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has been decided to execute the pre-read preview performance (see step 090IWS304 in FIG. 8-25) (step 090IWS807a). If it has been decided to execute the pre-read effect, the pending display of the preview target is changed to a special mode different from the normal mode (step 090IWS807b). If execution of the prefetch effect has not been determined, the process moves to step 090IWS808.

In step 090IWS808, the starting winning commands (symbol specification command, fluctuation category command, and pending memory number addition specification command (first pending memory number addition command) stored in the first storage area of the starting winning command storage area are executed. The designated command, the second pending storage number addition designation command) is deleted, and the contents of the start winning command storage area are shifted (step 090IWS808).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172) (step 090IWS809).

(Variable display processing)
FIG. 8-22 is a flowchart showing the variable display effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 090IWS841), and also subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 090IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 090IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 090IWS844). Furthermore, the control state for the production device is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data (step 090IWS845).

Next, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is any of the variation patterns PA1-2, PA1-4, PA1-6, PA2-2, PC1-4 to PC1-6. (Step 090IWS846). If the fluctuation pattern is not one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-2, PA1-4, PA1-6, PA2-2, PC1-4 to PC1-6, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display being executed is the fluctuation pattern PA3-2, PA3-4. , PB3-2, PD3-4 to PD3-6 (step 090IWS852). Note that it can be determined whether or not it is one of these variation patterns, for example, by checking the variation pattern commands stored in the variation pattern command storage area. If the above is the case, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it is time to switch the performance (step 090IWS847). To determine whether it is time to switch the effect, for example, check the value of the variable time timer set in step 090IWS816 of the variable display start setting process, and check if the elapsed time from the start of the variable display is 15 seconds. This can be determined by checking whether the time has elapsed.

If it is time to switch the performance, the performance control CPU 120 switches to the process data for the advanced performance (step 090IWS849). Next, the performance control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 090IWS857). Then, the process moves to step 090IWS864.

If it is not the variation pattern PC1-4 to PC1-9 in step 090IWS846, if it is not the variation pattern PD3-4 to PD3-9 in step 090IWS852, or if it is not the timing to switch the effect in step 090IWS847, proceed to step 090IWS864. do.

Then, if the variable time timer has timed out (step 090IWS864), the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol waiting process (step S173) (step 090IWS865).

(Special drawing waiting process)
FIGS. 8-23 and 8-24 are flowcharts showing the special symbol per waiting process (step S173) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the special figure hit waiting process, the production control CPU 120 first checks whether the jackpot stop flag is set (step 090IWS871). The jackpot stop flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot symbol has already been derived and displayed, but before the jackpot start designation command is received, and is set in step 090IWS875, which will be described later. If the jackpot stop flag is set, the process moves to step 090IWS876.

If the jackpot stop flag is not set, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the small hit stop flag is set (step 090IWS872). The small hit stop flag is a flag indicating that the small winning symbols have already been derived and displayed, but before the small winning start designation command is received, and is set in step 090IWS883, which will be described later. If the small hit stop flag is set, the process moves to step 090IWS885.

If the small hit stop flag is also not set, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbols (loss symbols, jackpot symbols, small win symbols) (step 090IWS873).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS873 (Y in step 090IWS874), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS875). Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 090IWS876). It should be noted that whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking whether the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 090 IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start designation command has not been received, the process ends immediately.

If the jackpot start designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS877). Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the jackpot performance (step 090IWS878). Then, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 090IWS879), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the presentation device (image display device 5 as presentation component, various lamps as presentation component, and speaker 27 as presentation component) is executed according to data 1) (step 090 IWS880).

Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the production process during the jackpot (step 090IWS881).

If the jackpot symbol has not been stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS873 (N in step 090IWS874), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small win symbol has been stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (step 090IWS882). . When the small hit symbols are stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (Y in step 090IWS882), the production control CPU 120 sets a small hit stop flag (step 090IWS883). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 090IWS885). In addition, whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking in the command analysis process whether or not a flag indicating that the small hit start designation command has been received is set. If the small winning start designation command has not been received, the process ends as is.

If the small hit start designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the small hit stop flag (step 090IWS886). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it is a small hit A or a small hit B (with time saving) (step 090IWS887a). If it is a small hit A or B, a process table for a small hit notification effect that notifies a small hit and a right hit instruction A that instructs a right hit is selected (step 090IWS887b). In addition, if it is not small hit A or small hit B, that is, if it is small hit C (no time saving), there will be a V winning promotion performance that encourages the game ball to enter the V winning hole and a right hit instruction B that instructs right hitting. process data (step 090IWS887b). Note that the right-handed hitting instruction A and the right-handed hitting instruction B have different modes. Further, the right-handed hitting instruction is different from the right-handed hitting instruction C in the time saving state. For example, the difference in aspect is the size, position, and content of the image for instructing right-handed batting.

Then, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 090IWS888), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the presentation device (the image display device 5 as the presentation component, various lamps as the presentation component, and the speaker 27 as the presentation component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 090IWS889). Further, the performance control CPU 120 sets a small win performance period measurement timer for measuring the performance period during the small win game (step 090IWS890).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit performance process (step 090IWS891).

In addition, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to be in the open state during the small winning game, so in the small winning performance processing, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to be opened as a small winning performance. The performance is executed.

If it is determined that there will be neither a jackpot nor a small hit (N in step 090IWS882), that is, if it is determined that it is a loss, the production control CPU 120 changes the value of the production control process flag. It is updated to a value corresponding to the display start waiting process (step S170) (step 090IWS895).

(Pre-read notice setting process)
FIG. 8-25 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the advance notice setting process (step S161). In the advance notice setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a new starting winning command has been received (step 090IWS301). In addition, whether or not a new starting winning command has been received can be determined by, for example, receiving a new symbol designation command, variable category command, starting winning designation command (first starting winning designation command, first starting winning command, etc.) in the starting winning command storage area. This determination can be made by checking whether or not the 2-start winning prize designation command) and the total pending memory number designation command are stored. If a new start winning command is not received, the process ends.

If a new start winning command is received (Y in step 090IWS301), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it is in the normal state or not (step 090IWS301a). If the status is not normal, the process ends.

If it is in the normal state, it is checked whether the total number of pending memories is 2 or more (step 090IWS302). Note that whether or not the total number of pending memories is two or more can be determined, for example, by checking the total number of pending memories stored in the total pending memory number storage area. If the total number of pending memories is not 2 or more, the process ends.

If the total number of pending memories is 2 or more (Y in step 090 IWS302), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether there is a pending memory that will be a jackpot or a small win among the pending memories up to one prior to the pending memory that is the target of the notice. It is confirmed whether or not (step 090IWS302a). Then, if there is a pending memory that will become a jackpot or a small hit among the pending memories up to one prior to the pending memory of the preview target, the performance control CPU 120 uses the prefetched preview performance determination table for prefetched notice restriction (see FIG. 8 -28(J)) (step 090IWS304a). In addition, if there is no pending memory that will be a jackpot or small hit among the pending memories up to one prior to the pending memory of the notice target, the performance control CPU 120 will update the latest one stored in the starting winning command storage area. The variable category command is read out, and a prefetched preview effect determination table corresponding to the read variable category command is selected as a table for determining the presence or absence and type of a prefetched preview effect (step 090 IWS303).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 uses the selected prefetched preview performance determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers, and determines the presence or absence and type of the prefetched preview performance (step 090IWS304).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the pre-read preview performance (step 090IWS305). If it is determined not to perform the pre-read preview performance, the process ends. When it is decided to execute a pre-read preview performance, the performance control CPU 120 associates the determined type of pre-read preview performance with the pending memory of the preview target, and stores the pre-read preview performance storage area formed in the RAM. (Step 090IWS306).

(Ahead preview performance decision table)
FIGS. 8-26 to 8-28 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the pre-read preview effect determination table.

Of these, FIG. 8-26(A) shows a specific example of a look-ahead preview effect determination table that is selected when the determination result of the variable category indicated by the variable category command is out of reach. Further, FIG. 8-26(B) shows a specific example of a look-ahead preview effect determination table that is selected when the determination result of the variable category indicated by the variable category command is that the normal reach is off. Further, FIG. 8-26(C) shows a specific example of a look-ahead preview effect determination table that is selected when the determination result of the variable category indicated by the variable category command is out of normal reach.

Further, FIG. 8-27(D) shows a specific example of a look-ahead preview effect determination table that is selected when the determination result of the variable category indicated by the variable category command is a normal reach jackpot. FIG. 8-27(E) shows a specific example of a look-ahead preview effect determination table that is selected when the determination result of the variable category indicated by the variable category command is a super reach jackpot.

In addition, FIG. 8-28 (F) shows the specifics of the look-ahead preview effect determination table that is selected when the judgment result of the variable category indicated by the variable category command is normal reach small hit (that is, small hit C). An example is shown. In addition, Figure 8-28 (G) shows the look-ahead preview effect determination table that is selected when the judgment result of the variable category indicated by the variable category command is a super reach small hit (that is, when the small hit C is small). A specific example is shown. In addition, Figure 8-28 (H) shows the lookahead that is selected when the judgment result of the variable category indicated by the variable category command is a non-reach development small hit (that is, small hit A or small hit B). A specific example of a preview performance determination table is shown. In addition, Figure 8-28 (I) shows a look-ahead notice that is selected when the judgment result of the variable category indicated by the variable category command is a normal reach development small hit (that is, small hit A or small hit B). A specific example of the production determination table is shown. Furthermore, FIG. 8-28 (J) shows a specific example of a look-ahead notice effect determination table for look-ahead restriction that is selected when there is a jackpot or a small hit in the previous pending memory. .

In this example, the mode (color) of the hold display is white in the normal mode. Then, when the pre-read preview effect is executed, the color changes to blue, green, red, or gold as a special mode.

As shown in Figure 8-26 (A), when the non-reach is out of reach, including the case where a development effect is executed, the rate at which the pending display color remains white is 100%, and other Judgment values are assigned so that the color selection ratio is 0%.

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-26 (B), when the normal reach is out of reach, including when executing a development effect, the color of the pending display remains white 80% of the time, and blue is selected. The determination values are assigned such that the ratio is 15%, the selection ratio of green is 5%, and the selection ratio of other colors is 0%.

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-26 (C), when the super reach is out of reach, the color of the pending display remains white 60% of the time, the selection rate of blue is 20%, and the selection rate of green is 60%. The determination values are assigned such that the selection rate is 10%, the selection rate of red is 4%, and the selection rate of gold is 1%.

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-27 (D), in the case of a normal reach jackpot, the color of the pending display remains white 35% of the time, the selection rate of blue is 1%, and the selection rate of green is 35%. Judgment values are assigned such that the ratio is 150%, the selection ratio of red is 40%, and the selection ratio of gold is 9%.

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-27 (E), in the case of a super reach jackpot, the percentage of pending display remaining white is 10%, the selection percentage of blue is 0%, and the selection percentage of green is 10%. The determination values are assigned such that the selection rate is 20%, the selection rate of red is 60%, and the selection rate of gold is 10%.

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-28 (F), when it is a normal reach small hit (that is, when it is a small hit C), the percentage that the color of the pending display remains white is 60%, The determination values are assigned such that the selection rate of blue is 1%, the selection rate of green is 10%, the selection rate of red is 19%, and the selection rate of gold is 0%.

Also, as shown in Figure 8-28 (G), when it is a super reach small hit (that is, when it is a small hit C), the percentage of the pending display color remaining white is 60%. The determination values are assigned such that the selection ratio of blue is 0%, the selection ratio of green is 15%, the selection ratio of red is 25%, and the selection ratio of gold is 0%.

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-28 (H), in the case of a non-reach development small win (that is, small win A or small win B), the percentage of the pending display color remaining white is 80%, the determination values are allocated such that the selection ratio of blue is 5%, the selection ratio of green is 15%, the selection ratio of red is 0%, and the selection ratio of gold is 0%.

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-28 (I), when it is a normal reach development small hit (that is, when it is small hit A or small hit B), the percentage that the color of the pending display remains white is 70%, and the determination values are assigned such that the selection ratio of blue is 10%, the selection ratio of green is 20%, the selection ratio of red is 0%, and the selection ratio of gold is 0%.

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-28 (J), when restricting prefetching, the color of the pending display remains white 80% of the time, the selection rate of blue is 20%, and the selection rate of green is 80%. Judgment values are assigned such that the percentage is 0%, the selection percentage of red is 0%, and the selection percentage of gold is 0%.

In this way, in this example, a pre-reading determination is made at the time of starting winning, and a pre-reading effect can be executed based on the result of the pre-reading determination. The prefetch effect is executed by changing the color of the pending display. Comparing Figures 8-28 (F) to (G) and Figures 8-28 (H) to (J), there are cases where the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and cases where the display result is small hit A or small hit B. The rate at which the pre-read preview performance is executed differs depending on the case where the display result of winning C is derived and displayed. Then, when the previous pending memory stores a pending memory in which any of the display results of jackpot, small hit A, small hit B, and small hit C is derived and displayed, as shown in Figure 8-28. By selecting the table (J), the execution of the prefetch preview effect for pending memories subsequent to this pending memory is restricted (see step 090IWS304a in FIG. 8-25). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-28 (J), the look-ahead preview performance is restricted by making it easier to select blue, which has a low jackpot expectation, or no execution. Therefore, when the display results of small win A, small win B, and small win C are derived and displayed, the performance can be suitably executed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a sense of discomfort due to the change in the state at the time of starting winning and the state at the time of variation, and the variation pattern selected at the time of starting winning and the variation pattern selected after a jackpot or small win being different, and the look-ahead effect can be suitably executed. can.

It should be noted that it is possible to configure the system so that the pre-read notice is limited when a variation pattern command or a display result command is missed. In this case as well, for example, it is possible to select the pre-read preview performance with the lowest jackpot expectation among the display results that can be specified from the variation pattern. For example, in the case of normal reach, the display results that can be identified are (1) a display result that becomes a small hit and is almost certainly possible to enter the V-winning slot and develops into a jackpot, (2) a display result that becomes a small win and saves 100 times in time. If the display result can be one of the following: (3) a small win but almost certainly no winning in the V-winning slot and no time savings, the pre-read preview performance corresponding to (3) is executed. .

In addition, in this example, as shown in steps 090IWS303 to 090IWS304 in FIG. 8-25, and as shown in FIGS. Determine whether. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not a display result that is a jackpot will be derived and displayed, a pre-read preview effect can be executed. In this case, if a pending memory from which a jackpot display result is derived and displayed is stored, by selecting the table in Figure 8-28 (J), a pre-read preview effect for pending memories subsequent to this pending memory can be displayed. The restriction mode of the pre-read preview performance is the same in the case where the execution is restricted and the display result of small hit A or small win B is derived and displayed, and the case where the display result of the jackpot is derived and displayed (Figure 8 -25 step 090IWS304a). Therefore, inconsistency between the pre-read preview performance and the performance after the jackpot game state or the time-saving state can be avoided, so that the pre-read preview performance can be suitably executed.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 8-27 (D) to 8-28 (J), when the display result of one of small hit A, small hit B, and small hit C is derived and displayed. It is possible to perform a common pre-read effect when a display result that becomes a jackpot is derived and displayed (for example, the color may change to blue or green in either case). Then, when a display result that is one of small hit A, small hit B, or small hit C is derived and displayed, a look-ahead effect in which the expectation level of the display result that is a jackpot is derived and displayed is not more than a specific value. . In other words, it does not change to gold, which has the highest jackpot expectation. Therefore, since the player does not have excessive expectations, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing when a display result that is a small win is derived and displayed.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 8-28 (F) to (J), when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed. The rate at which a pre-read preview performance with an expected value equal to or higher than a predetermined value is executed differs depending on when it is displayed. Specifically, when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, the pending display does not change to red, but when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, the pending display changes to red. It can change to Further, the expected jackpot value of red is greater than a predetermined value, which is higher than that of green. Therefore, since the player does not have excessive expectations, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing when a display result that is a small win is derived and displayed.

Also, what can be said from Figures 8-26 to 8-28 is that the gold is guaranteed to be a jackpot, so it is a color that fuels the expectation of a jackpot. In addition, red has a higher expectation of a jackpot than blue or green, and furthermore, it does not turn red in the case of small hit C (no time saving) or when it is a loss, but it turns red in the case of small hit A or small hit B (with time saving). It can be. Then, when the small hit A or small hit B is reached, the development effect will be executed, so if the pending display turns red due to the advance notice and the development effect is executed, it is confirmed that the time saving state will be controlled. I can say that. This makes it possible to draw attention to both the hold display and the fluctuation pattern, thereby increasing the interest of the game. It should be noted that it may be configured such that a development promotion effect that suggests that a development effect is to be executed can be executed, and the development is determined at the time when the development promotion effect is executed. In addition, it is more likely to turn green in the case of small hit A or small hit B (with time saving) than in the case of small hit C (no time saving). In other words, when the color turns green, the development effect is likely to be executed. Furthermore, red is a color that has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than blue or green.

Note that the pre-read preview performance is not limited to changing the color of the pending display, and may be performed in other ways. For example, when announcing a small win with a time saving, it is possible to display a background such as a special zone background, or to make a special character appear.

(Example of production)
Next, specific examples of effects will be described in the case of small win A or B (with time saving) and in the case of small win C (with no time saving).

FIGS. 8-29 to 8-31 show the screen transition when a small win A or a small win B (with time saving) occurs in the normal state (low probability/low base state).

As shown in FIG. 8-29(A), when controlled in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the image display device 5 displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the upper left corner. The small pattern 090IW100 on the left middle right is displayed. In this example, since most starting winnings occur in the first starting winning hole in the normal state, an example is shown in which a game ball enters the first starting winning hole and the variable display of small symbols 090IW100 is started. . Then, in conjunction with the variable display of the small pattern 090IW100, the decorative pattern 090IW101 on the left center right, which is larger than the small pattern 090IW100, starts to change at the center of the screen.

In this example, for example, three pending displays 090IW112 for the first special symbol are displayed. The pending display is white in the normal state, but by changing it to blue, green, red, or gold, it is possible to perform a prediction performance that predicts a big hit or a small hit. The jackpot expectation is in the order of gold, red, green, and blue (that is, gold is the highest and blue is the lowest). Also, when you win a small prize, it does not change to gold, but it can change to red, green, or blue. When the color changes to red, there is no time saving, but the expectation level for a small win that is likely to lead to a V win increases. Moreover, in this example, since the pending memory related to the variation in the figure shows an example where a small hit occurs, the pre-reading notice for the pending memory after the pending memory related to the variation is limited. Therefore, the pending display 090IW112 can change to blue even if the prefetch preview effect is executed, but it does not change to green, red, or gold.

As shown in FIGS. 8-29(B) and (C), it is assumed that the left and right ornamental symbols 090IW101 have stopped and become normal reach due to the jackpot symbol. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 8-29(D), it is assumed that the inner decoration pattern 090IW101 stops in the state shown in FIG. 8-28(C) and the missing pattern stops. At this time, the decorative pattern 090IW101 is not in a completely stopped state but in a temporarily stopped state with shaking. Note that the small design 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 8-29(E), the decorative pattern 090IW101 temporarily stopped in the state of FIG. 8-28(D) is once erased and the development effect is executed. In this example, the characters 090IW102 indicating that the time saving state is being controlled are displayed larger than the small pattern 090IW100 in the center of the screen. Note that the small design 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 8-29(F), after the development effect shown in FIG. 8-29(E) is executed, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 090IW101 is again displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIGS. 8-29(G) and (H), it is assumed that the left and right decorative symbols 090IW101 have stopped and become a ready-to-win state for small win A or small win B. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 8-30(I), it is assumed that the remaining decorative symbols 090IW101 have stopped and the small winning symbol "135" of small winning A or small winning B has stopped. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 also stops at "135" at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 8-30 (J), when the small winning symbol "135" stops in the small symbol 090IW100 and the decorative symbol 090IW101, the small winning symbol will be awarded in the pre-opening time before the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is in the open state. The characters 090IW103 indicating the start of the small hit! are displayed in the center of the screen in a larger size than the small symbol 090IW100.

As shown in Figure 8-30 (K), when the small winning game starts, the background A indicating that the small winning is in progress is displayed, and the text "Small winning" is displayed to inform that the small winning game is in progress. 090IW105 is displayed. In addition, in the case of small win A or small win B, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the V winning hole, making it difficult to generate a jackpot. For this reason, although it is more unfortunate for the player than small win C, which is more likely to generate a jackpot, in the case of small win A or small win B, the time is controlled to be shortened by V non-winning. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the special variable winning ball device 090IW17, the right-hand hit instruction display (right-hand hit instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed, and at the same time, the right-hand hit instruction display (right hit instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed so as not to unnecessarily provoke the player and arouse a sense of regret. The instruction display (right-handed instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed in a small and inconspicuous manner at the bottom right of the screen. The right-handed hitting instruction display 090IW106 is composed of the words "right-handed hitting" and one right-pointing arrow. In order to make the right hit instruction display 090IW106 less noticeable, the small winning medium background A has a flashy background that attracts the player's interest, such as by featuring a character.

As shown in FIG. 8-30(L), when the small winning game state ends without winning the V winning slot, an end screen is displayed during the ending period of the small winning. For example, the background and characters corresponding to the end screen are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 8-30(M), after the end screen of the small winning game is displayed, the start screen of the time saving state is displayed. For example, an image indicating that the time saving state has started and the number of changes in the time saving state are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 8-30 (N), when the display of the start screen of the time saving state is finished, the variable display of the small pattern 090IW100 and the decorative pattern 090IW101 on the left middle right is started, and the control of the time saving state is started. When control of the time saving state is started, the background of the time saving state is displayed, and the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state 090IW107 is displayed at the upper right of the screen. Furthermore, during the time saving state, a right-hand hit instruction display (right-hand hit instruction C) 090IW108 is displayed at the top of the screen in order to cause the game ball to enter the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B. The right-hand hitting instruction display 090IW108 during the time-saving state is composed of the words "right-hand hitting" and two right-pointing arrows. Note that the right-handed hitting instruction display 090IW108 is larger than the right-handed hitting instruction display 090IW106, and the display position is also different.

As shown in FIGS. 8-30(O), 8-31(P), and (Q), it is assumed that the decorative pattern 090IW101 has stopped, the small pattern 090IW100 has stopped, and the missed pattern has stopped.

As shown in FIG. 8-31 (R), the next variation is then started, and when the variation display of the decorative symbol 090IW101 and the small symbol 090IW100 is started, the remaining number of variations 090IW107 is subtracted. Thereafter, similar control is performed until the time saving state ends.

FIGS. 8-32 and 8-33 show the screen transition when the small hit C (no time saving) occurs in the normal state (low probability/low base state).

As shown in FIG. 8-32(A), when controlled in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the image display device 5 displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the upper left corner. The small pattern 090IW100 on the left middle right is displayed. In this example, since most starting winnings occur in the first starting winning hole in the normal state, an example is shown in which a game ball enters the first starting winning hole and the variable display of small symbols 090IW100 is started. . Then, in conjunction with the variable display of the small pattern 090IW100, the decorative pattern 090IW101 on the left center right, which is larger than the small pattern 090IW100, starts to change at the center of the screen.

As shown in FIGS. 8-32(B), (C), and (D), it is assumed that the decorative pattern 090IW101 on the left center right has stopped, and the small winning pattern "357" of small winning C has stopped. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 also stops at "357" at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 8-32(E), when the small winning symbol "357" stops in the small symbol 090IW100 and the decorative symbol 090IW101, the small winning symbol will be awarded in the pre-opening time before the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is in the open state. The characters 090IW103 indicating the start of the small hit! are displayed in the center of the screen in a larger size than the small symbol 090IW100.

As shown in Figure 8-32 (F), when the small winning game starts, the background B during the small winning is displayed and the game ball is fired aiming at the V winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 090IW17. The characters 090IW109, "Aim for V!", are displayed to inform you that this will happen. In addition, in the case of small win C, it is easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, making it easy to generate a jackpot. Therefore, players are happy because they can get a large amount of balls. Therefore, in order to cause the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 and generate a jackpot, the right-handed hitting instruction display (right-handed hitting instruction B) 090IW110 is displayed, and the right-handed hitting instruction display 090IW110 is displayed in a large and conspicuous manner in the center of the screen. Display in the following manner. The right-handed game instruction display 090IW110 is composed of the words "right-handed game" and three right-pointing arrows. In order to make the right hit instruction display 090IW107 more conspicuous, the small winning medium background B is a simple screen without characters or the like, and is a plain background that does not attract the player's interest. Note that the right-hand hitting instruction display 090IW110 is larger than the right-hand hitting instruction display 090IW106 in small hit A or small hit B and the right hitting instruction display 090IW108 during time saving, and the display position is also different.

In this way, the right-hand hitting instruction display 090IW106 for small win A or small hit B, the right-hand hitting instruction display 090IW110 for small hit C, and the right-hand hitting instruction display 090IW108 during time saving are different in size, display position, display mode ( number of arrows) are both different.

As shown in Figure 8-32 (G), when a prize is entered in the V winning slot and the small winning game state ends, it is suggested that during the ending period of the small winning, a winning occurs in the V winning slot and a jackpot occurs. The character "V" 090IW104 is displayed in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 8-33(H), next, the characters 090IW111 indicating that the jackpot game (second round) has started are displayed larger than the small symbol 090IW100 in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 8-33 (I), when the jackpot game (second round) is started, the background of the jackpot is displayed, and the game is played in the jackpot game state. The same goes for the third and fourth rounds. In addition, in this example, we will explain an example in which a small hit C occurs during the normal state, but even if a small hit C occurs during the time saving state, the same effect as described above will be performed during the small win game, and the small win will be A larger right-hand hit instruction display is displayed than in the case of hit A or small hit B. Further, different performances may be performed and the size of the right-hitting instruction display may be made different depending on whether a small hit C occurs during the normal state or when a small hit C occurs during the time saving state.

In this way, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is opened when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed. The effects executed when controlled by the state are different. Specifically, when the small win is A or B, the characters 090IW105 indicating that the small win is in progress are displayed during the small win game (Fig. 8-30). K)), the characters 090IW109 indicating that the game ball will be fired aiming at the V winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 are displayed (FIG. 8-32(F)). Therefore, when a display result that results in a small win is derived and displayed, an effect can be suitably executed.

Further, in this example, the variable prize winning ball device 6B is provided so that a game ball passing through a right-handed hitting path can be entered by hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area so that the game ball can flow down. Then, a launch promotion display related to promoting the launch of the game ball to the right-handed path is performed, and when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed. The firing promotion display is performed in different ways depending on the time. Specifically, when it is a small hit C, it is easier to generate a jackpot unlike when it is a small hit A or B, so when it is a small hit A or B, the right hit instruction display 090IW106 (Figure 8-30 (K) (see Fig. 8-32 (F)) is displayed, and when the small hit is C, a right-hand hit instruction display 090IW110 (see Fig. 8-32 (F)) is displayed. Therefore, the game can be progressed suitably.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-29(E), it is possible to execute a performance that suggests that the time saving state will be controlled as a preview performance of a small hit. That is, the characters 090IW102 indicating that the advanced effect is executed and the time saving state is controlled are displayed. As a result, the variety of pre-read preview presentations increases, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modified example)
Next, a modified example of the effect executed in this feature section 090IW will be described. In the following, in the modified example, in Figure 8-6, when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, the special variable prize is We have given an example in which the ease with which a game ball enters the V winning hole is varied by varying the opening pattern of the ball device 090IW17, and whether or not to control the time saving state is controlled. The special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is opened with the same pattern when the display result of hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, but the special variable By varying the time before opening of the winning ball device 090IW17, the ease of winning a game ball to the V winning hole is varied, and it is controlled whether or not to control the time saving state. Note that explanations of parts common to those in FIG. 8-6 will be omitted.

FIG. 8-34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small winning game. The operation of the V winning opening opening/closing plate 090IW20 is the same for small win A or B (with time saving) and small win C (no time saving).

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (A), in the case of small win A or B (with time reduction), after starting the small win game at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) has elapsed, at timing S2. The special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to be in the open state. In this way, by setting the pre-opening period t1, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to be in the open state when the V winning a prize opening/closing plate 090IW20 is controlled to be in the closed state. Then, by repeating the operation of opening the special winning hole for 0.05 seconds, closing it for 1 second, and opening the special winning hole again for 0.05 seconds, the special winning hole can be opened 10 times with one small hit. It will be released.

As shown in FIG. 8-33 (B), in the case of small win C (no time saving), after starting the small win game at timing S1, the pre-release period t2 (fanfare time) shorter than the pre-release period t1 After the elapse of time, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to be in the open state at timing S2. In this way, by setting the pre-opening period t2, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to be in the open state when the V winning a prize opening/closing plate 090IW20 is controlled to be in the open state. Then, by repeating the operation of opening the special winning hole for 0.05 seconds, closing the special winning hole for 1 second, and then opening the special winning hole for 0.05 seconds again according to the same pattern as in Figure 8-34 (A), A special prize opening will be opened 10 times with one small hit.

As mentioned above, in this example, when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, special variable winning balls are used in the same pattern. Device 090IW17 can be controlled in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the time saving state, and it is possible to prevent the display result from being derived and displayed as a small win from being known in advance.

In addition, in this example, the V winning opening/closing board performs a common operation when the display result of small hit A or small win B is derived and displayed and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed. Equipped with 090IW20, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to open state when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed. The length of time it takes to complete the process varies. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the time saving state.

(Other variations)
In addition, in this characteristic part 090IW, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of small winnings in which it is impossible to win a game ball into the V winning hole. And, as multiple types of small wins, a small hit that enters the special winning hole but enters the V winning hole but shifts to a time saving state when the game ball does not enter the V winning hole, and a small hit that enters the special winning hole but enters the V winning hole. A small win that does not shift to a time-saving state when a ball does not win is provided. Then, there is a small hit that enters the special winning slot but the game ball does not enter the V winning slot, which shifts to the time saving state, and a small hit that enters the special winning slot but the game ball does not enter the V winning slot. It is possible to perform a different performance depending on the small hit that does not shift to the time saving state. The performance may be made different between the fluctuating state and the small winning game state, or both may be different.

In addition, in this example, in the pachinko game machine 1 in which a V winning hole is provided in the special variable winning ball device 090IW17, a small win with a time saving or a small winning without a time saving is generated, and a hold memory that becomes a small win is included. Although we have given an example in which the execution of the look-ahead performance is restricted when the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is installed, a pachinko game in which the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is not provided, and only the special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. Machine 1 is configured so that a small hit occurs as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and includes a pending memory that results in a small win with a time reduction or a small win without a time reduction. It may be configured to restrict the execution of prefetch effects. For example, in a pachinko game machine equipped with a small hit RUSH (high probability/low base state), it is possible to restrict the execution of a look-ahead effect.

In addition, in each of the characteristic parts and modifications described above, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always exemplified through the jackpot state or small win state, but the present invention The invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without operating the special variable winning ball device 7. .

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the winning symbol or may be a part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for small winning symbols, a random number for jackpot lottery determination, a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with other symbol combinations that are displayed as missed symbols.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether using a special random number or another random number, the starting opening (first starting winning opening), It is sufficient to win at the time of winning in the second starting prize opening).

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and the small winning symbol is used in the time-saving symbol lottery. When using random numbers, the random number of a specific small winning symbol can be used as the winning value, and when the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the time saving symbol lottery, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and the passage of the game ball through the time saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time saving symbol.

In addition, regarding winning when a time-saving symbol is drawn, if a winning symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific winning symbol is used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state, no matter which random number is used for the lottery. . However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time saving state, even if the number of time saving times is reset or the lottery is not selected, this may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed can be a plurality of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time-saving granting conditions can be made different for each time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

In addition, a drawing lottery for the time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-saving times may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small winning state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after hitting a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability low base state is controlled when the gaming hall opens. After the high probability low base state is finished after variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated.

Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to be a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

In addition, in this example, it is possible to configure so that when the number of variations of the symbol in the normal state reaches a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is controlled (so-called ceiling). Specifically, a counter is provided to count the number of fluctuations until the time-saving state is controlled, and the counter starts counting when the RAM is initialized (when operating the clear switch, when changing settings, etc.) or when the jackpot ends. do. Then, when the counted number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, the time saving state is controlled. The counting method is to subtract the value set in the counter every time there is a change and determine whether the count value becomes 0 or not, thereby determining whether the number of changes has reached a predetermined number. Alternatively, the value of the counter may be incremented each time there is a change, and it may be determined whether the number of changes has reached a predetermined number. Note that the predetermined number of times until the time saving state is controlled may be determined by lottery. This makes it impossible to know when the time-saving state is controlled, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the predetermined number of times n, which is the number of times the symbol changes until the time saving state is controlled, is, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/319, P = 319), It is possible to satisfy 2.5P≦n≦3.0P. In addition, the predetermined number of times N, which is the number of times the symbol changes until the time saving state is controlled, is, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/319, P = 319), It is possible to satisfy 0.4P≦N≦3.8P. Note that these are just examples, and P is not limited to these ranges.

Further, the setting of the predetermined number of times P during RAM initialization (when operating a clear switch, changing settings, etc.) and when hitting a jackpot may be carried over from the number before initialization. In this case, it can be expected that the number of fluctuations will reach the predetermined number P soon after the start of the game, and the time will be controlled to be shortened, so that the operating rate of the pachinko game machine can be increased.
On the other hand, when initializing the RAM (when operating a clear switch, changing settings, etc.) or setting the predetermined number of times P when hitting a jackpot, the number of times before initialization may not be carried over. In this case, any player can play the game under fair conditions.

Also, when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number and the time saving state is controlled, the time saving state may be ended when the number of fluctuations reaches the upper limit number of times, or the time saving state may be continued until the next jackpot. good.

Note that counting of the number of fluctuations may be started again when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number. In the case of this configuration, for example, if an upper limit number of times of the time saving state is set and the upper limit number of times is set larger than a predetermined number of times until the time saving state is controlled, the count value will reach the predetermined number of times during the time saving state. Since the upper limit number of times is set again, it is possible to continue the time saving state until the next jackpot while setting the upper limit number of times.

It is also possible to not count the number of fluctuations during the time saving state. In this case, if an upper limit number of times of the time saving state is set, the time saving state ends when the number of fluctuations reaches the upper limit number of times.

In addition, when the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the first number, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the time saving state, and if the lottery is not won, the time reduction is performed when the number of fluctuations reaches the second number. (a so-called pattern that reaches the ceiling via a false ceiling).

In addition, if a ceiling is provided in the characteristic part IW090 and it is configured to be controlled to a time-saving state when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times, no matter whether it is small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction). The counter value continues counting without being reset. In the case of small win C (no time saving), if a jackpot does not occur, the counter value continues counting without being reset. As a result, in the case of a small win A or B (with time saving), the count value may reach a predetermined number of times during the time saving after the small winning game ends, and the time saving state may be extended. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for the development after the end of the small winning game. In addition, even if the small hit C (no time saving) occurs and the jackpot does not occur, there is a possibility that the time saving state will be controlled immediately after the small winning game ends, so please look forward to the development after the small winning game ends. You can have it.

As explained above, this feature section 090IW discloses the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1A) to (means 6A).

(Means 1A)
A gaming machine that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) being derived and displayed,
State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, step 090IWS462 and step 090IWS468 in the game control microcomputer 100 (part to be executed) and
It has a special area (e.g., V prize opening) and is controlled into a first state (e.g., open state) in which game media can easily enter and a second state (e.g., closed state) in which game media cannot enter or it is difficult to enter. Possible variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 090IW17),
When a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is displayed, the variable means can be controlled to the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-5, the variable means can be controlled to the first state, the part that executes step S118 in the microcomputer 100),
The special display results include a first special display result (for example, a display result that results in a small win A or B) and a second special display result that is different from the first special display result (for example, a small win C). (display results);
The state control means includes:
In the normal state, when the first special display result (for example, the display result of small win A or small win B) is derived and displayed, the control to the special state is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-18). , the part that executes step 090IWS462 and step 090IWS468 in the game control microcomputer 100),
In the normal state, when the second special display result (for example, the display result of small win C) is derived and displayed, the control to the special state is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, the game control (The part in which the processing of step 090IWS462 and step 090IWS468 is not executed when step 090IWS467 is N in the microcomputer 100),
A determining means for determining whether to derive and display the special display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 090IWS68);
Before the determination by the determination means, a determination means for determining whether the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. part) and
A pre-read preview performance execution means (for example, a part that executes step 090IWS807 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 8-21) capable of executing a pre-read preview performance based on the determination result of the determination means;
Further comprising a reservation storage means (for example, a first reservation storage buffer, a second reservation storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as reservation storage,
The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed differs between the case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, there is no change in Fig. 8-28). parts with different proportions),
When a pending memory from which the first special display result or the second special display result is derived and displayed is stored, the execution of the pre-read preview effect for pending memories stored after the first special display result is restricted (e.g. , as shown in Figure 8-25, the part that executes step 090IWS304a in the production control CPU 120 does not change to the highly expected "green", "red", and "gold" according to the table in Figure 8-28 (J). part).
According to such a configuration, when the special display result is derived and displayed, it is possible to suitably perform the effect.

In addition, in this example, an example is given in which the execution of the prefetch preview effect is limited by limiting the color of the pending display to a part (no change, blue), but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. As a restriction, for example, the number of types of advance notice performances is not executed, the number of types of advance notice performances is reduced (for example, only the notice with a pending display, the notice based on a chance, and the notice due to entering a zone is executed with a pending display, etc.). Normally, overlapping execution of multiple types of look-ahead preview performances is allowed, but overlapping execution is no longer allowed (overlapping execution of previews with pending display and previews with chance eyes is allowed, but only previews with pending display can be executed) Various aspects are possible, such as: In addition, the mode of restriction is different depending on when the pending memory from which the first special display result is derived and displayed is stored and when the pending memory from which the second special display result is derived and displayed is stored. It's okay.

In addition, in this example, the look-ahead preview performance is restricted even when the reserved memory of the jackpot is included in addition to the small win, but the look-ahead notice is also limited when a fluctuation pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot is selected. Performances may be limited. Furthermore, even when the number of targets for restrictions on advance notice performances increases, by making the manner of restriction common and preventing the number of such limitations from increasing, it is possible to prevent the lottery for determining the manner of advance notice performances from becoming complicated. .

(Means 2A) In means 1A,
The determining means determines to derive and display the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 090IWS62 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The determination means determines that the specific display result is to be derived and displayed before the determination by the determination means (for example, as shown in FIG. execution part),
The pre-read preview performance execution means is capable of executing the pre-read preview performance based on the determination result of deriving and displaying the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21, the performance control CPU 120 The part that executes step 090IWS807),
When a pending memory from which the specific display result is derived and displayed is stored, the execution of the prefetch preview performance for pending memories stored after the specific display result is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25). , the part that executes step 090IWS304a in the production control CPU 120, the part that does not change to the highly anticipated "green", "red", and "gold" according to the table of FIG. 8-28 (J)),
The restriction aspect of the pre-read preview performance is the same in the case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and the case where the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25, (The part where step 090IWS304a is executed in the control CPU 120, and the part that does not change to "green", "red", and "gold", which are highly expected according to the table of FIG. 8-28(J)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid inconsistency between the pre-read preview performance and the performance after the advantageous state or in the special state, so that the pre-read preview performance can be suitably executed.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A or 2A,
As a performance that foretells that the special display result will be derived and displayed, a performance that suggests that the special state will be controlled can be executed (for example, the part shown in FIG. 8-29(E)).
According to such a configuration, the variety of preview presentations is increased, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this example, as a preview performance that foretells that a small win will occur, it is suggested that the time reduction state will be controlled by displaying "Save time?" (Figure 8-29 (E)) by executing the advanced performance. Although an example is given in which a performance is performed, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. As a preview performance that foretells that there will be a small win, for example, a small win (including the case where a prize occurs at the V prize opening and a jackpot) is performed that is common to the performance that suggests that there will be a jackpot. Various aspects can be considered, such as executing a performance that suggests that something will happen. Furthermore, in addition to the performance that gives advance notice of the fluctuation, a performance that foretells that a special display result will be derived and displayed may be performed in a pre-read advance notice performance.

(Means 4A) In any of the means 1A to 3A,
The determining means determines to derive and display the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 090IWS62 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The determination means determines that the specific display result is to be derived and displayed before the determination by the determination means (for example, as shown in FIG. execution part),
The pre-read preview performance execution means is capable of executing the pre-read preview performance based on the determination result of deriving and displaying the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21, the performance control CPU 120 The part that executes step 090IWS807),
The prefetch effect execution means is capable of executing the prefetch effect that is common both when the special display result is derived and displayed and when the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 and FIG. 8-28),
When the special display result is derived and displayed, the look-ahead effect in which the expectation level for the specific display result to be derived and displayed is greater than or equal to a specific value is not executed (for example, as shown in Figure 8-28, when "gold" is the part that does not change).
According to such a configuration, since the player does not have excessive expectations, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing when the special display result is derived and displayed.

(Means 5A) In any of the means 1A to 4A,
When the first special display result is derived and displayed, and when the second special display result is derived and displayed, the rate at which the look-ahead preview performance with an expected value equal to or higher than a predetermined value is executed is different (for example, As shown in Figure 8-28, the portions that change to “red” at different rates).
According to such a configuration, since the player does not have excessive expectations, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing when the special display result is derived and displayed.

In addition, in this example, when there is a small hit C (a small hit that is not controlled in the time-saving state, but is likely to result in a win at the V winning opening), a small hit A or a small hit B (although it is controlled in the time-saving state). An example is given in which the display changes to a red pending display that does not change when there is a small win in which a win is unlikely to occur in the V winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the display can change to red pending both when there is a small hit C and when there is a small hit A or small hit B, but it is more likely to be displayed when the small hit is C than when it is a small hit A or small hit B. Increase the rate of change to the red pending display; change to the red pending display when there is a small win A or small win B (a small win that is controlled to shorten the time but is difficult to win in the V winning slot). However, when it is a small win C (a small win that is not controlled by the time saving state but is likely to result in a win in the V winning slot), the red pending display does not change, and when it is a small win C and a small win A or a small win. It is possible to change to the red pending display at any time when B, but the rate of change to the red pending display is higher when the small win is A or B than when the small win is C. , various aspects are possible.

(Means 6A) In any of the means 1A to 5A,
a plurality of types of special display results in which the game medium does not pass through the special area;
The plurality of types of special display results include the special display result in which the game medium is controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area, and the special display result in which the game medium is controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area. The special display result is not controlled by a state,
When the special display result is derived and displayed, the special display result is controlled to be in the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area, and when the game medium is not passed through the special area, it is controlled to be in the special state. A different effect is performed when the special display result that is not displayed is derived and displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

Further, this feature section 090IW discloses the configurations of gaming machines shown below (means 1B) to (means 8B).

(Means 1B)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) being derived and displayed,
State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, step 090IWS462 and step 090IWS468 in the game control microcomputer 100 (part to be executed) and
It has a special area (e.g., V prize opening) and is controlled into a first state (e.g., open state) in which game media can easily enter and a second state (e.g., closed state) in which game media cannot enter or it is difficult to enter. Possible variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 090IW17),
A production execution means capable of executing production (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion of the production control CPU 120 that executes step S76),
When a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is displayed, the variable means can be controlled to the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-5, the variable means can be controlled to the first state, the part that executes step S118 in the microcomputer 100),
The special display results include a first special display result (for example, a display result that results in a small win A or B) and a second special display result that is different from the first special display result (for example, a small win C). (display results);
The state control means includes:
In the normal state, if the game medium does not pass through the special area when the first special display result (for example, the display result of small win A or small win B) is derived and displayed, the special state is entered. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the process of step 090IWS462 when Y in step 090IWS461a and the process of step 090IWS468 when Y in step 090IWS467a),
In the normal state, if the game medium does not pass through the special area when the second special display result (for example, the display result of small win C) is derived and displayed, the control to the special state is not performed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, when step 090IWS467 in the game control microcomputer 100 is N, the processing of step 090IWS461a and step 090IWS462, step 090IWS467a and step 090IWS468 is not executed),
The ease with which the game medium passes through the special area differs between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6). (part shown),
The effect execution means performs different effects when the variable means enters the first state in a case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and a case where the second special display result is derived and displayed. It is executable (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-24, the part that executes steps 090IWS887b and 887c in the production control CPU 120, the part shown in FIG. 8-30 (K) and FIG. 8-32 (F)).
According to such a configuration, when the special display result is derived and displayed, it is possible to suitably perform the effect.

In addition, in this example, an example was given in which the state is shifted to the time saving state after the end of the small winning game on the condition that a prize is won in the special winning opening but the V prize is not won, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, in the case of a small win, the time saving state may be entered after the small win game ends on the condition that the game ball does not enter the special winning opening.

(Means 2B) In means 1B,
The rate at which the specific performance is executed in the performance that is being variablely displayed differs between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, in Figure 8- 7. As shown in Figure 8-8, the development effect is performed when there is a small win A or B, but is not performed when the small win is C).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid inconsistency between the pre-read preview performance and the post-advantageous state or special state performance, so that the pre-read preview performance can be suitably executed.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or means 2B,
The variable prize winning device is provided so that game media passing through a predetermined route (for example, a right-handed route) can enter,
A firing promotion display means for displaying a firing promotion display (for example, displaying a right-hand hit instruction) regarding promoting the firing of game media to the predetermined route. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-24, steps 090IWS887b and 887c are executed in the performance control CPU 120 ),
The firing promotion display means performs the firing promotion display in different manners when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30(K) and FIG. 8-32(F)).
According to such a configuration, the game can be suitably progressed.

In addition, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is opened so as not to win a V prize at the time of a small win A or a small win B, which shifts to the time saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that a V win has not been won. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a small win may be provided which causes the player to enter the time saving state after the small win game ends on the condition that the player does not win a V prize, and also opens the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 to facilitate a V win.

(Means 4B) In any of the means 1B to 3B,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state using different patterns when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, (part shown in Figure 8-6).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 5B) In any of the means 1B to 4B,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state using the same pattern when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the special state, and it is possible to prevent which special display result will be derived and displayed from being known in advance.

(Means 6B) In any of the means 1B to 5B,
The variable winning means includes a movable member (for example, a V winning opening/closing plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. 090IW20),
When the first special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state of obstructing passage of game media to the special area,
When the second special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member does not obstruct passage of game media to the special area ( For example, the part shown in Figure 8-6).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 7B) In any of the means 1B to 6B,
The variable winning means includes a movable member (for example, a V winning opening/closing plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. 090IW20),
The period until the variable winning means is controlled to the first state differs depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed or when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-34).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 8B) In any of the means 1B to 7B,
a plurality of types of special display results in which the game medium does not pass through the special area;
The plurality of types of special display results include the special display result in which the game medium is controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area, and the special display result in which the game medium is controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area. The special display result is not controlled by a state,
When the special display result is derived and displayed, the special display result is controlled to be in the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area, and when the game medium is not passed through the special area, it is controlled to be in the special state. A different effect is performed when the special display result that is not displayed is derived and displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

Further, this feature section 090IW discloses the configurations of gaming machines shown below (means 1C) to (means 8C).

(Means 1C)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) being derived and displayed,
State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, step 090IWS462 and step 090IWS468 in the game control microcomputer 100 (part to be executed) and
It has a special area (e.g., V prize opening) and is controlled into a first state (e.g., open state) in which game media can easily enter and a second state (e.g., closed state) in which game media cannot enter or it is difficult to enter. Possible variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 090IW17),
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion of the performance control CPU 120 that executes step S76),
The variable display of the first identification information can be executed based on the gaming medium passing through the first starting area, and the variable displaying of the second identification information can be executed based on the gaming medium passing through the second starting area. a variable display execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step S110);
When a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is displayed, the variable means can be controlled to the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-5, the variable means can be controlled to the first state, the part that executes step S118 in the microcomputer 100),
The special display results include a first special display result (for example, a display result that results in a small win A or B) and a second special display result that is different from the first special display result (for example, a small win C). (display results);
The state control means includes:
In the normal state, if the game medium does not pass through the special area when the first special display result (for example, the display result of small win A or small win B) is derived and displayed, the special state is entered. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the process of step 090IWS462 when Y in step 090IWS461a and the process of step 090IWS468 when Y in step 090IWS467a),
In the normal state, if the game medium does not pass through the special area when the second special display result (for example, the display result of small win C) is derived and displayed, the control to the special state is not performed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, when step 090IWS467 in the game control microcomputer 100 is N, the processing of step 090IWS461a and step 090IWS462, step 090IWS467a and step 090IWS468 is not executed),
When the special display result is derived and displayed by executing the variable display of the first identification information, and when the special display result is derived and displayed by executing the variable display of the second identification information, The ratio at which the second special display result is derived and displayed is different (for example, the parts shown in Figures 8-5 (C) and (D)),
The effect execution means performs different effects when the variable means enters the first state in a case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and a case where the second special display result is derived and displayed. It is executable (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-24, the part that executes steps 090IWS887b and 887c in the production control CPU 120, the part shown in FIG. 8-30 (K) and FIG. 8-32 (F)).
According to such a configuration, when the special display result is derived and displayed, it is possible to suitably perform the effect.

In addition, in this example, an example was given in which the state is shifted to the time saving state after the end of the small winning game on the condition that a prize is won in the special winning opening but the V prize is not won, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, in the case of a small win, the time saving state may be entered after the small win game ends on the condition that the game ball does not enter the special winning opening.

(Means 2C) In means 1C,
The rate at which the specific performance is executed in the performance that is being variablely displayed differs between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, in Figure 8- 7. As shown in Figure 8-8, the development effect is performed when there is a small win A or B, but is not performed when the small win is C).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid inconsistency between the pre-read preview performance and the post-advantageous state or special state performance, so that the pre-read preview performance can be suitably executed.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C,
The variable prize winning device is provided so that game media passing through a predetermined route (for example, a right-handed route) can enter,
A firing promotion display means for displaying a firing promotion display (for example, displaying a right-hand hit instruction) regarding promoting the firing of game media to the predetermined route. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-24, steps 090IWS887b and 887c are executed in the performance control CPU 120 ),
The firing promotion display means performs the firing promotion display in different manners when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30(K) and FIG. 8-32(F)).
According to such a configuration, the game can be suitably progressed.

In addition, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is opened so as not to win a V prize at the time of a small win A or a small win B, which shifts to the time saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that a V win has not been won. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a small win may be provided which causes the player to enter the time saving state after the small win game ends on the condition that the player does not win a V prize, and also opens the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 to facilitate a V win.

(Means 4C) In any of the means 1C to 3C,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state using different patterns when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, (part shown in Figure 8-6).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 5C) In any of the means 1C to 4C,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state using the same pattern when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the special state, and it is possible to prevent which special display result will be derived and displayed from being known in advance.

(Means 6C) In any of the means 1C to 5C,
The variable winning means includes a movable member (for example, a V winning opening/closing plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. 090IW20),
When the first special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state of obstructing passage of game media to the special area,
When the second special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member does not obstruct passage of game media to the special area ( For example, the part shown in Figure 8-6).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 7C) In any of the means 1C to 6C,
The variable winning means includes a movable member (for example, a V winning opening/closing plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. 090IW20),
The period until the variable winning means is controlled to the first state differs depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed or when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-34).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 8C) In any of the means 1C to 7C,
a plurality of types of special display results in which the game medium does not pass through the special area;
The plurality of types of special display results include the special display result in which the game medium is controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area, and the special display result in which the game medium is controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area. The special display result is not controlled by a state,
When the special display result is derived and displayed, the special display result is controlled to be in the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area, and when the game medium is not passed through the special area, it is controlled to be in the special state. A different effect is performed when the special display result that is not displayed is derived and displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 079SG)
Next, the feature section 079SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be explained. FIG. 9-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG. As shown in FIG. 9-1, the audio control board 13 in the feature section 079SG has an audio synthesis board that works together with the performance control CPU 120 to generate sounds (performance sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is equipped with an IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 that amplifies the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and an audio data ROM079SG133. Based on the production control command, the sound number data is output to the voice synthesis IC079SG132, and the voice synthesis IC079SG132 generates a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the performance control CPU 120, the sound synthesis IC079SG132 generates sounds and sound effects for each of the speakers 8L and 8R individually according to the input sound number data, and sends them to the amplifier circuit 079SG134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesis IC079SG132, and outputs the amplified sound to each speaker 8L and 8R.

The audio data ROM079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting a sound corresponding to the performance executed by the performance command to which the sound number data corresponds in association with the sound number data. . In other words, these control data include the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from each speaker 8L and 8R during the performance period (for example, decorative pattern variable display period). is a collection of data including audio data etc. described in chronological order.

FIG. 9-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature section 079. The display area of the image display device 5 in the feature portion 079SG is formed into a rectangular shape with a height L and a width L from side to side when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decorative symbols, a ready-to-reach effect, an operation promotion effect described later, and a still image display effect. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reservation storage display area 079SG005D in which the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed by the number of reservation displays in an outlined circle, and a second reservation storage number of special symbols can be displayed in white. A second display area 079SG005Sa is configured including a second hold storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed depending on the number of circular hold displays, and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop that indicates the gaming status.

That is, a portion of the entire display area of the image display device 5 excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

Note that the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display game-related information (pending display, telop display, fourth symbol This is the display area where the number of reserved memories is displayed. In other words, the second display area 079SG005Sa and third display area 079SG005Sb in the feature section 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 displays a fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first special symbol pending memory number, and a display of the second special symbol pending memory number. 3 display area 079SG005Sb.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The horizontal width is formed to have the same length as the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. Further, the third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and horizontal width are extremely shorter than the height H and the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. There is.

Therefore, in this feature section 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F occupying the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. .

As shown in FIG. 9-2(B), in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, the performance control CPU 120 executes a pending display operation process (see FIG. 8-13), which will be described later. As a result, each pending display can be displayed rotating around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotational speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 9-2(C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the performance control CPU 120 executes the telop operation process (see FIG. 9-13), which will be described later. A message (for example, if a specific reach effect is in progress, a message according to the state of the effect such as "In XX mode!") is moved from the left to the right at a constant speed (for example, movement speed V3). It can be displayed simultaneously.

Furthermore, when the characters included in the message according to the gaming state reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and the display ends, they are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and are moved from the left to the right again. be moved in a direction. Therefore, when a message corresponding to the gaming state is being moved and displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the gaming state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can It is now easier to recognize the current gaming status.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, a form is provided in which the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display in the first hold memory display area 079SG005D and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are at different constant speeds. It may also be possible to rotate and move.

As shown in FIG. 9-2 (D), the fourth symbol 079SG005J has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb, and these upper symbol 079SG005Ja and lower symbol 079SG005Jb flash alternately at a constant cycle. This indicates that special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, for these upper pattern 079SG005Ja and lower pattern 079SG005Jb, if the variable display result is a loss, both will be turned off (turned OFF) at the end timing of the variable display, while the variable display result will be a jackpot or a loss. In this case, both lights are turned on (turned ON) at the end timing of the variable display.

In addition, the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are based on the timing at which a new pending memory occurs and the timing at which a new variable display starts. This is a display in which only the number changes. In other words, the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U. , unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of variable display.

Next, the display control section 123 in the feature section 079SG will be explained. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 is capable of displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on instructions from the performance control CPU 120, and can display multiple types of image data. By arranging the images and displaying the images on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When not displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. The predetermined image is not displayed on the production screen by controlling the image based on the data not to be displayed on the production screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 9-3(A) to 9-3(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 9-3(A), image data 1 displays the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and displays the fourth This is data drawn to display the pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn to display a small pattern of the image data 1 decorative pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 9-3(B), image data 2 is data drawn to display images of a chance-up effect, a still image display effect, and an operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. .

As shown in FIG. 9-3(C), image data 3 is data drawn to display variable display of decorative symbols and reach effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 9-3(A) to 9-3(C), these image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 have display priorities for displaying the images on the image display device 5. is set. As for the display priority, image data 1 is set to be the highest and image data 3 is set to be the lowest (display priority of images in the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3). . That is, in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as a lower layer image. The image is displayed as a lower layer (lowest layer) image than the image based on image data 1 and the image based on image data 2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-3(D), in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 2 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3, and an image based on image data 1 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3. The image based on image data 2 and the image based on image data 3 are displayed with priority.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 9-3(D), when an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3 are displayed on the image display device 5 at the same time, image data 3 Since the image based on the image data 3 is displayed as the lowest hierarchical image, the image based on the image data 3 may be at least partially difficult to see or become invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, although details will be described later, images based on image data 1 and image data 2 are always displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images whose progress speed is constant, while images based on image data 3 The image based on the image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a moving image or a still image at a plurality of advancing speeds based on data stored in the CGROM in advance.

In particular, with this feature section 079SG, the details will be described later, but during the super reach reach effect, the video of the reach effect can be displayed at the normal progress speed V1 and the progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. It becomes. This is because the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 and the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, only the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and by performing predetermined processing on this data, a part of the effect video for the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may also be possible to display it.

In this way, in this feature section 079SG, by setting the video progress speed, which is the speed at which the performance video changes, to V1, the non-slow motion period, where the progress speed of the ready-to-reach performance perceived by the player is the fast first speed, and the video By setting the progressing speed to V2, which is slower than V1, a slow motion period is set in which the progressing speed of the ready-to-reach effect recognized by the player is at a second slow speed. In other words, a slow-motion video that is a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance in this feature section 079SG is slow is that the video progresses compared to a non-slow-motion video whose video progress speed is V1, which is displayed before the slow-motion video. It is fine as long as it is slow.

Note that this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects (see Figures 9-18 to 9-25), but the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, for example, the content of the effect video displayed on the image display device 5 as a super reach effect is the same as the content of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 9-18 to 9-25, but the video progress speed By executing a super reach performance that does not change from V1 to V2, that is, a slow motion period, the super reach performance shown in Figures 9-18 to 9-25 becomes a slow motion period. It may be made easier for the player to recognize.

In other words, when performing a super reach effect in which the content of the effect video is the same but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect video at the second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention This means that by displaying a video with the same content at a video progression speed V2 that is slower than the video progression speed V1 in a non-slow motion super reach performance, The displayed performance video corresponds to this.

As described above, in this feature section 079SG, by slowing down the video progress speed of the performance video, a slow motion performance is created in which the progress speed of the reach performance that the player feels is slow, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is Although the output of the output does not change from the playback speed V3, the present invention is not limited to this. By conversely speeding up the playback speed of the sound output from the game effect lamp 9 and the light emission period of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion that makes the player feel that the progress speed of the ready-to-win performance has slowed down may be constructed.

In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG is equipped with a plurality of performance output means including a display means capable of displaying a performance video, and the speed of progress of the performance by at least one performance output means among these performance output means. Any technique may be used as long as it can make the player recognize that the performance being executed is slow motion during the slow motion period by making the difference between the slow motion period and the non-slow motion period.

Note that this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which the display of the reach effect animation is always executed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion The period may be such that the progress speed of the display of the reach effect animation can be changed (for example, the progress speed may gradually decrease over time, or the progress speed may increase or decrease within a predetermined range).

FIG. 9-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this feature section 079SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 9-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 9-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", a "big hit", or a "small hit". Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state where probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variation. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are executed when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 9-4(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 9-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-5, in this feature part 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determining the display result of ordinary figures are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154 shown in FIGS. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " 997'' range.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 9-6(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 079SG, a common special figure display result judgment table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table being referenced.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 079SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 079SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more judgment values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 079SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 079SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 9-6(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 079SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 9-7(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 079SG determines whether the jackpot type is one of multiple types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 079SG using FIG. 9-7(B), in this feature section 079SG, as jackpot types, high accuracy control and time saving control are performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C" are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, only the time saving control is executed and the state changes to a low probability high base state. A transitional “non-probable jackpot” is set.

The jackpot game state based on "probable variable jackpot A" is a jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). The jackpot game state based on the "probable variable jackpot B" is a jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds). The jackpot game state based on the "probable variable jackpot C" is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed in two rounds (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds). Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. The "non-probable variable jackpot" is sometimes referred to as the 2-round (2R) non-probable variable jackpot.

Also, although not particularly illustrated, the small winning game state in this feature section 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the opening time is the same as that of the variable jackpot C. This is the open period (0.1 seconds in this feature part 079SG). Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

The high-precision control and time-saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming states of Probable Variable Jackpot A, Probable Variable Jackpot B, and Probable Variable Jackpot C are continuously executed until a jackpot occurs again after the corresponding jackpot gaming state ends. . Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot A or variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. This occurs continuously, resulting in a so-called consecutive home situation.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 079SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9-7(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, "probable strange jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 9-7(A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot type of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the type of jackpot may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 9-8 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 079SG. In this characteristic part 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Although this feature section 079SG provides only one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. are provided. It may be provided. Furthermore, a plurality of super reach variation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . .

Incidentally, the variation patterns in this feature section 079SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small win".

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 079SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as will be described later, the type of these fluctuation patterns is determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and the random number MR3 for determining the type of variation may be provided. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random number value, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 9-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 079SG. In this feature section 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α3 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-5 (Super Reach β3 jackpot fluctuation pattern). In addition, if the variable display result is Probable Variable Jackpot A or Probable Variable Jackpot B, select Variation Pattern Judgment Table B for Jackpot, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (Normal Reach Jackpot) using the Variation Pattern Judgment Table A for Jackpot. (variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

As shown in FIG. 9-9, the numbers of determination values assigned to PB1-2 to PB1-5 are different between the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 to PB1-3, 300 to PB1-4, and 500 to PB1-5. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 to PB1-3, 315 to PB1-4, and 515 to PB1-5. In other words, in this feature section 079SG, when the variable display result is a variable jackpot, the percentage of PB1-3 and PB1-4, which are the super reach β system variation patterns, is higher than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. Since the variation pattern in the variable display is determined as follows, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special win fluctuation pattern determination table, and use the special win fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the fluctuation pattern as PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern). do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α2 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern determination table C for the loss, and Using the variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α2 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (Non-reach deviation pattern for time saving), PA2-1 (Normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (Super reach α2 deviation pattern), PA2-3 (Super reach α3 deviation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is off) and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 079SG is "off", the special figure is The rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being delayed and shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 9-8, the reach performance of Super Reach α1 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first reach performance, which will be described later, is executed. This is a reach effect where the display result is a jackpot, and the reach effect of Super Reach α2 (the reach effect executed with the variable display of variable pattern PA2-2) executes the first half and the second half of the first reach effect, which will be described later. This is a reach effect in which the variable display result is off after the change, and the reach effect of Super Reach α3 (the reach effect executed with variable display in variable pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach effect described later. This is a ready-to-win performance in which a second ready-to-win performance, which will be described later, is further executed after the first half and the second half of the performance are executed, and the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss.

Regarding the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in Figures 9-8 and 9-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the more variable the display. It is set so that the percentage of the result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is high. In other words, for the variable displays of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, the percentage of the variable display results that reach the jackpot after being executed up to the second reach effect is the same as the rate at which the first reach effect is executed. The variable display result is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, the reach performance of Super Reach β1 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PB1-4) is a reach performance in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot after the first half of the third reach performance, which will be described later, is executed. Yes, the reach performance of Super Reach β2 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PA2-4) has a variable display result that is off after the first half and the second half of the third reach performance, which will be described later, are executed. This is a reach performance, and the reach performance of Super Reach β3 (the reach performance executed with variable display in variable pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) executes the first half and the second half of the third reach performance, which will be described later. After that, a fourth reach effect to be described later is executed, and the variable display result is a reach effect in which the result is a jackpot or a miss.

As for the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, as shown in Figures 9-8 and 9-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the more variable the display. It is set so that the percentage of the result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is high. In other words, for the variable displays of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5, the percentage of variable display results that are executed up to the 4th reach effect and the variable display result becomes a jackpot is The variable display result is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot.

Note that in this feature section 079SG, the second reach effect is always performed after the first reach effect, and the fourth reach effect is always executed after the third reach effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the second ready-to-win performance and the fourth ready-to-win performance may be executed alone.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, during variable display, each reach effect can be executed in combination of the first reach effect and the second reach effect, and can be executed in combination with the third reach effect and the fourth reach effect. Although possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to these, and the reach effect can be combined with combinations other than these combinations (for example, the first reach effect and the fourth reach effect, the second reach effect and the third reach effect). A case may also be provided in which this is executed in combination with a reach effect, etc.).

In addition, in this characteristic part 069SG, as shown in Figure 9-9, the fluctuation patterns of the super reach β system (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally the same as those of the super reach α system. The proportion of variable display results that become jackpots (jackpot expectation level) is set higher than the variation patterns (variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3). Although not limited to, some of the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach β series (variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach α series (variation patterns PA2- 2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) may have a lower jackpot expectation.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 079SG includes a game control data holding area 079SG150 as shown in FIGS. is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 9-10 includes a first special symbol reservation storage section 079SG151A, a second special symbol reservation storage section 079SG151B, a regular symbol reservation storage section 079SG151C, and a game control flag setting section 079SG152. , a game control timer setting section 079SG153, a game control counter setting section 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 079SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 079SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 079SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal figure reservation storage section 079SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 079SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 079SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 079SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 is an area for holding various data used to control production operations, such as data storage for production control as shown in FIG. 9-11(A). Area 079SG190 is provided. The performance control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 9-11(A) includes a performance control flag setting section 079SG191, a performance control timer setting section 079SG192, a performance control counter setting section 079SG193, and a performance control buffer setting section 079SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 079SG191 includes a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 079SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 079SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 079SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting section 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 079SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. 9-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 079SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning prize designation command (the first starting opening winning prize designation command or the second starting opening winning prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (the Two commands (1 pending memory number notification command or 2nd pending memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are associated with the starting opening winning designation command and the pending storage number notification command. , storage areas (entries) for separately storing the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory are secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are determined later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" are It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when ending the process.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A when a starting winning is made to the first starting winning opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in Figure 9-11(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 9-11(B), when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the first special symbol holding memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning determination process of the feature section 079SG executed in step S101 in FIG. 6 will be described based on FIGS. 9-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079SGS101; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value is (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154, for example. When the first special symbol pending memory number is not the upper limit value at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 079SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbol pending memories has reached the upper limit value at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 079SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079SGS104; Y), the number of second special figure pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 079SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 079SGS105 (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 079SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (step 079SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 079SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 079SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 079SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning prize designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 079SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, the effect control board 12 is stored in the pending memory. Settings for transmitting the number notification command are performed (step 079SGS113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115), and then the process of step 079SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS116), and then the starting opening is won. Finish the process. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 9-13 is a part of a flowchart showing the production control process processing in the feature section 079SG. In the production control process processing, the production control CPU 120 executes the prefetch notice setting process (step S161), and then updates the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U, and Hold display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotating display) the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation process (step 079SGS163) and the fourth symbol display process (step 079SG164) that executes the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J, one of steps S170 to S177 is executed depending on the value of the production control process flag. Execute the process.

FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 079SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special symbol pending memory in the reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of start winning are set. Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0". Then, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

Further, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A are stored for one buffer number each. Shift to the upper position (step 079SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is a third variable display result designation command or a fourth variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot B or probability variable jackpot C, a stop symbol other than "7" It is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is determined from among the chance numbers "334", "778", etc. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the performance control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), proceed to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y) executes a chance-up effect determination process (step 079SGS278), and determines whether or not to execute a chance-up effect in the second half of the first ready-to-reach effect or the second half of the third ready-to-reach effect.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 9-15, if the variable display result is a failure, the decision is made to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 20%, and the decision is made not to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 80%. decide. Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 80%, and it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 20%. In other words, in the variable reach display of the feature section 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the jackpot expectation level is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-27 and 9-32, only one performance pattern is provided as a performance mode of chance-up performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of performance patterns may be provided as the performance mode of the chance-up performance, and the expected degree of jackpot may be different depending on which performance pattern the chance-up performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this feature part 079SG, there is only one timing to start the chance up performance as shown in FIGS. 9-27 and 9-32, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of performance start timings may be provided, and the expected degree of jackpot may be varied depending on from which performance start timing the chance-up performance is started.

Further, after determining whether to execute or not execute the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079SGS279). If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279; Y), the notification performance (big hit notification performance or miss A still image display effect for determining a performance pattern of a still image display effect that displays the still image displayed at the end of the second reach effect on the image display device 5 during a period until the start of the notification effect (notification effect). The determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 9-16(A), if the variable display result is a failure, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100%. If pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a jackpot, the still image display performance pattern will be determined to pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80% and pattern SG-2 at a rate of 20%. do.

As shown in FIG. 9-16(B), the still image display effect pattern SG-1 freezes the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach effect. The still image display effect pattern SG-2 is a performance pattern that is displayed as a still image after the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 is displayed as a still image at the end of the second reach performance. , is a production pattern that changes the color of the still image.

In particular, pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot, so when the second reach effect is executed, the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the still image changes color.

In addition, if it is not the variation pattern of super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) ( Step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079SGS282; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach β3 (step 079SGS281; Y ), executes the operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during the execution of the fourth reach effect, and proceeds to step 079SGS283. .

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 9-17(A), if the variable display result is a failure, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect to pattern SS at a rate of 80%. -1 is determined, and pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-2 at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 9-17(B), the operation promotion performance pattern SS-1 is a performance pattern in which an image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The effect pattern SS-2 is an effect pattern in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a larger size than the pattern SS-1.

In other words, the operation promotion performance in the feature section 079SG is performed when the image of the large size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion performance is executed in pattern SS-2). (in the case where the image of the push button 31B of normal size is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5) is higher than the case (in which case the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Since the variable display result has a high probability of becoming a jackpot (a jackpot notification effect is executed), the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion effect is executed. This allows players to increase their interest in gaming.

In step 079SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute each effect such as the above-mentioned chance-up effect, still image display effect, operation promotion effect, etc., and the effect control pattern (process table) according to the effect pattern and variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 079SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the production control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 079SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display production process (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In addition, in the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer every time the variable display performance process is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction times out. Determine whether or not. If the process timer after the subtraction has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer after the subtraction has timed out, the process data At the same time as the switching is performed, the next process timer is started, and the presentation device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

Next, the performance mode of variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in this feature section 079SG will be explained based on FIGS. 9-18 to 9-35.

First, regarding the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in Figures 9-18, 9-19, and 9-26 (A) to 9-26 (G), when the variable display starts, the image display In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, a moving image such as a variable display of decorative patterns is started at a normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right (the moving speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progressing speed of V3. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R start playing BGM, sound effects, etc. according to the variable display at the normal playback speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts blinking at a constant cycle. Ru. Hereinafter, the blinking or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in this feature section 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are all synchronously blinking or lighting. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

As shown in Figures 9-18, 9-19, and 9-26 (A) to 9-26 (C), when the development timing of the reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first half of the first reach effect is reached. The execution period begins, and a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A is started. As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first half execution period of the first reach performance begins, a video in which the friendly character A attacks the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 described above to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which the attack of friendly character A towards enemy character A is displayed in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is a variable display of super reach α1, when the first half execution period of the first reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 9-18 and 9-26 (E) to 9-26 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, after a video of friendly character A's successful attack and enemy character A falling down is displayed as a jackpot notification effect, the decorative symbols stop at the jackpot combination and the jackpot game state is controlled. will be notified. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

During the jackpot notification performance, the video of the part where ally character A's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to Figure 9-26 (E)), and the subsequent enemy character The display of the moving image of the part where the robot collapses is executed at the advancing speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 9-26(F)). Then, the video of the part where the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination and it is announced that the jackpot game state is controlled is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Figure 9-26 (G) ).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of Super Reach α2 or Super Reach α3, when the first half execution period of the first reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 9-19 and 9-26 (D) , the attack of the ally character A is not successful, and the period shifts to the second half execution period of the first reach performance.

As shown in Figures 9-19 and 9-27 (A) to 9-27 (B), when the second half of the first reach performance is executed, the battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, in the second half execution period of the first reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 9-27 (B). . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1, similar to the effect video of the battle effect.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first reach performance execution period approaches, a video of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which friendly character A attacks enemy character A in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F) In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α2, when the second half execution period of the first reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 9-19 and 9-27 (E) to 9-27 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a failure notification effect, after ally character A's attack fails and is defeated by enemy character A, the decorative symbols stop at a failure combination and the variable display result is a failure. will be notified.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the video display is executed at the normal progress speed V1 in the part where the attack of ally character A fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a failure. Ru.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguished display of the fourth symbol (display of the lights out of both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb) ) is carried out.

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach α3, as shown in Figures 9-20, 9-21, and 9-27 (D), during the second half execution period of the first reach effect, Character A's attack is successful and enemy character A is defeated. Then, the process shifts to the first half execution period of the second ready-to-reach performance.

As shown in Figures 9-20, 9-21, and 9-28 (A) to 9-28 (B), when moving to the execution period of the first half of the second reach effect, ally character A and enemy character B The battle performance progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first half of the second reach performance begins to run, as shown in Figures 9-20, 9-21, and 9-28 (C), an image is displayed as an effect performance. The display of concentrated lines starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, and at the same time, the display of the moving image of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character B starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

Additionally, during the period in which friendly character A attacks enemy character B in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, while the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, the blinking cycle of the gaming effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9-28(D), the number of concentrated lines as the effect production described above is gradually increased and displayed.

In other words, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, the progress speed of the battle effect video decreases to V2, and the number of concentrated lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases and the game effect lamp 9 blinks violently. Therefore, by increasing the number of concentrated lines and blinking the game effect lamp 9, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the performance result of the battle performance (Which one is executed, the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance). It is possible.

After the execution period of the second half of the second reach effect ends, it is displayed at the end of the battle effect as a still image display effect, as shown in Figures 9-20, 9-21, and 9-28 (E). The image that was displayed (in this feature section 079SG, the image immediately before the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F switches from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the rotation of the telop from left to right The movement in the direction is executed while maintaining the proceeding speed V3 without change, and the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is carried out without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 changes according to the progress of the video of the battle effect. The cycle returns to the previous cycle when the speed decreased to V2.

Furthermore, if pattern SG-2 is determined as the performance pattern for the still image display performance, as shown in Figures 9-29(A) to 9-29(E), the battle performance will be used as the still image display performance. The colors of the last displayed image are reversed. After the still image display effect in which the color is reversed ends, a jackpot notification effect is displayed stating that ally character A's attack hits enemy character B, and after enemy character B falls down, the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. be notified. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop at a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-29(F), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

As shown in Figure 9-20, the jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2 is that the video in which the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B is displayed at the progress speed V1. However, the moving image of the enemy character B falling down is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, a moving image in which the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination after the enemy character B falls down is displayed at a progressing speed V1. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop at a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect will not be reversed and the image shown in FIG. 9-30 (A) will be displayed as the still image display effect. ) ~ As shown in Figure 9-30 (D), there is a case where the jackpot notification effect is executed as described above, and a case where the jackpot notification effect is executed as shown in Figures 9-30 (F) ~ Figure 9-30 (H). There are times when a performance is performed.

The jackpot notification performance when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SG-1 is the same as the jackpot notification performance when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in Figure 9-20. In this example, a moving image in which the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B is displayed at a advancing speed of V1, but a moving image in which enemy character B falls down is displayed at advancing speed V2. Then, after the enemy character B falls down, the progress speed is displayed at V1. During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-30(E), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

In addition, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the failure notification effect is such that the attack of ally character A does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, the attack of enemy character B hits ally character A. After the ally character A falls down due to a hit, the decorative symbols stop at a wrong combination, and it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

As the failure notification effect, as shown in FIG. 9-21, a moving image of ally character A's attack without hitting and being defeated by enemy character B is displayed at a progressing speed of V1. During the failure notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (I), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are extinguished) ) is carried out.

Next, regarding the variable display of super reach β1 to β3 shown in Figures 9-22, 9-23, and 9-31 (A) to 9-31 (H), when the variable display starts, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, a moving image such as a variable display of decorative patterns is started at a normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right (the moving speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progressing speed of V3. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R start playing BGM, sound effects, etc. according to the variable display at the normal playback speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts blinking at a constant cycle. Ru.

As shown in Figures 9-22, 9-23, and 9-31 (A) to 9-31 (C), when the timing of the development of the reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first half of the third reach effect is reached. The execution period begins, and a battle performance between ally character B and enemy character A is started. As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first half execution period of the third reach performance begins, a video of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 described above to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period in which the attack of ally character B towards enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period when the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is the variable display of super reach β1, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 9-22 and 9-31 (E) to 9-31 (G). Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a jackpot notification effect, a moving image of friendly character B's successful attack and enemy character A falling down is displayed, and then it is announced that the jackpot game state will be controlled. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

During the jackpot notification performance, the video of the part where ally character B's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to Figure 9-30 (E)), and the subsequent enemy character The display of the moving image of the part where the robot collapses is executed at a traveling speed V2 that is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 9-30 (F)). Then, the video of the part where the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination and it is announced that the jackpot game state is controlled is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Figure 9-30 (G) ).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β2 or Super Reach β3, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 9-23 and 9-31 (D) , the attack of ally character B is not successful, and the execution period shifts to the second half of the third reach effect.

As shown in Figures 9-23 and 9-32 (A) to 9-32 (B), when the second half of the third reach effect is executed, the battle effect between ally character B and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, in the second half execution period of the third reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 9-32 (B). . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1, similar to the effect video of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed with priority over the effect animation of the chance-up effect, while the effect animation of the chance-up effect is displayed with the decorative pattern (the image shown in FIG. 9-32(B) It is displayed with priority over "7" displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display device 5. For this reason, in this feature section 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up performance, the player can recognize that the variable display is in progress by visually recognizing the small symbols, and also display the performance video of the chance-up performance. By displaying the symbols with priority over the symbols, it is possible to reliably secure an area on the image display device 5 for displaying the performance animation of the chance-up performance.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the performance video of the chance-up performance is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design is displayed with priority over the performance video of the chance-up performance. may also be displayed with priority. By doing so, the player can easily recognize from which combination of decorative symbols the reach effect that is currently being executed has developed, thereby improving the game's interest.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first reach performance execution period approaches, a video of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period in which the attack of ally character B towards enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period when the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β2, when the second half execution period of the third reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 9-23 and 9-32 (E) to 9-32 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a failure notification effect, after the attack of friendly character B fails and is defeated by enemy character A, it is reported that the variable display result is a failure.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the video display is executed at the normal progress speed V1 in the part where ally character B's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a failure. Ru.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are extinguished) ) is carried out.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β3, as shown in Figures 9-24, 9-25, and 9-32 (D), during the second half execution period of the 3rd reach effect, Character B's attack succeeds and defeats enemy character A. Then, the process moves to the execution period of the first half of the fourth reach effect.

As shown in Figures 9-24, 9-25, and 9-33 (A) to 9-33 (B), when moving to the execution period of the first half of the 4th reach effect, ally character AB and enemy character B The battle performance progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the fourth reach performance first half execution period approaches, the image display device 5 changes as shown in FIGS. 9-24, 9-25, and 9-33 (C). In the first display area 079SG005F, display of a moving image in which ally character B attacks enemy character B is started. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when friendly character B attacks enemy character B in slow motion (during the period when the progress speed of the battle production video in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, while the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, the blinking cycle of the gaming effect lamp 9 becomes shorter (the blinking cycle becomes shorter). faster).

In other words, in the second half execution period of the fourth reach performance, the progress speed of the video of the battle performance decreases to V2, and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 becomes more intense. It is possible to effectively draw a player's attention to the performance result (Which of the jackpot notification performance and the loss notification performance is executed).

Then, as the second half of the fourth ready-to-reach performance progresses, the operation promotion performance is executed. When the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-1, the push button 31B is displayed at the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 together with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba that imitates the shape of the push button 31B. The display of the meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period and the effect image 079SG005E is started, and the updated display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged updated display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the periphery of the image display device 5 are started. As mentioned above, the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on image data 2 (see Figure 9-3), so they are displayed at a constant rate regardless of the progress speed of the battle effect. Displayed as a video of progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 9-33(D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the period for accepting push button 31B operation can be notified to the player by updating the meter 079SG005M, while the effect image 079SG005E is enlarged. Update display progresses. In addition, since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player will be able to visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E, and when the operation promotion effect is not executed. The visibility of the battle performance is reduced. Since the execution period of the operation promotion performance is included in the second half of the fourth reach performance, the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion performance.

As shown in Figures 9-33 (D) and 9-33 (E), the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion performance, but the end timing of the operation promotion performance (push At the timing (timing when button 31B operation reception ends), the scene does not progress to the point where it is known whether or not the attack of friendly character B will hit enemy character B. In other words, the jackpot notification effect or the failure notification effect will not start. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-34(A) to 9-34(E), when the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-2, the first display on the image display device 5 In the center of the area 079SG005F, a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B starts to be displayed as an operation promotion image imitating the shape of the push button 31B, together with an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb whose size is larger than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. As mentioned above, the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on image data 2 (see Figure 9-3), so they are displayed at a constant rate regardless of the progress speed of the battle effect. Displayed as a video of progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 9-34(D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the period for accepting operation of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by an updated display of the meter 079SG005M, and at the same time, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb Most of the battle production images are hidden. Note that the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is an image having a larger size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and has a transmittance of 0%, as described above. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation promotion performance is included in the second half of the fourth reach performance, the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion performance.

As shown in Figures 9-34 (D) and 9-34 (E), the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion performance, but the end timing of the operation promotion performance (push At the timing (timing when button 31B operation reception ends), the scene does not progress to the point where it is known whether or not the attack of friendly character B will hit enemy character B. In other words, the jackpot notification effect or the failure notification effect will not start. It has become.

Then, if the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or if the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is If the game ends), the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed from the timing when these players operate the push button 31B or from the timing when the operation promotion performance ends.

As the jackpot notification performance after the operation promotion performance, as shown in Figures 9-24 and 9-35 (A) to 9-35 (C), a video of friendly character B's attack hitting enemy character B is shown. Although the animation is displayed at the advancing speed V1, the moving image of the enemy character B falling is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (D), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

Also, as a failure notification performance after the operation promotion performance, as shown in Figures 9-25 and 9-35 (E) to 9-35 (G), the attack of friendly character B hits enemy character B. First, on the contrary, after the enemy character B's attack hits the ally character B and the ally character B falls down, it is announced that the jackpot game state will not be controlled. In particular, when the failure notification effect is executed, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-25, as a failure notification performance, a moving image is displayed at a progressing speed V1 until the attack of ally character B does not hit and the decorative symbols stop with a failure combination. During the failure notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are extinguished) ) is carried out.

In addition, Figure 9-26 (H), Figure 9-27 (H), 10-29 (F), Figure 9-30 (E), Figure 9-30 (I), Figure 9-31 (H), Figure As shown in FIG. 9-32 (H), FIG. 9-35 (D), and FIG. 9-35 (H), in this characteristic part 079SG, the telop (message) is not displayed on the image display device 5 at the end timing of the variable display. Although a form in which the included telop display area 079SG005T is displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the end timing of the variable display, the display of the telop display area 079SG005T itself on the image display device 5 is However, the display of the telop (message) itself in the telop display area 079SG005T may not be performed.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, in the variable display of super reach α3 and super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened in a slow motion period other than immediately before the notification performance. Furthermore, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened also during a part of the period (non-slow motion period) in which the display of the ready-to-win effect animation is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 to 9-25, each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance is During the first half execution period, the videos of each reach performance are displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed of V1, and the second half of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance is displayed. During the partial execution period, the moving images of each reach effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V2. For this reason, while the video of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2, the degree of emotional empathy of the player towards the ally character displayed during the reach effect is increased, and jackpot notification is announced. Since it is possible to increase expectations for the execution of the performance, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. On the other hand, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance, BGM and performance sounds from speakers 8L and 8R are Since the output is still output at the normal playback speed of V4, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the sound output device in this feature section 079SG includes a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit 079SG134, and speakers 8L and 8R, so it is easy to reproduce the variable display including when performing a reach effect, when playing a jackpot game, etc. Performance sounds such as high-quality BGM (songs) and sound effects can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R at appropriate volumes, making it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 9-20, 9-21, 9-24, and 9-25, during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, the game effect Since the lamp 9 flashes at a shorter period than usual, the performance effect can be improved by flashing the game effect lamp 9 at a shorter period during the period when the progress speed of the performance video is V2.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, a mode is exemplified in which the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second ready-to-win performance or the fourth ready-to-win performance. By doing so, the player can recognize from the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification effect will be executed soon, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given in which the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing from the first ready-to-win effect to the fourth ready-to-win effect.

In addition, as shown in Figures 9-19 to 9-25, during the execution period of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect, the progress of the effect video of the reach effect. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, the rotation speed of the hold display and the moving speed of the caption are both constant at V3, and the playback speed of the performance sound output from speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given in which the rotation speed of the hold display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the moving display speed of the caption are both V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. The rotational speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each reach effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, so each reach effect During execution, the player can more easily recognize the ready-to-reach effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-18 to 9-25, in the period other than during the reach effect, the rotating display of the pending display is rotated at rotation speed V3 in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U. This is executed, and in the telop display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is executed at the moving speed V3. In other words, the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the telop are executed at the same speed as during the reach effect, so that the player can It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-2(C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and end the display, and at the same time the characters are displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Since it is displayed again at the left end of 079SG005T and moved again from the left to the right, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the entire telop is always displayed moving in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire telop is always displayed moving in the telop display area 079SG005T. There may be a timing when a part of the displayed telop becomes invisible to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-20, 9-21, and 9-28, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, the display of the effect animation of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, and the image By executing the effect presentation of displaying concentrated lines on the display device 5, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect during the latter half execution period of the second ready-to-reach presentation, thereby improving the interest in the game. In particular, in this feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-28(C) and 1-28(D), the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as the battle performance progresses, so the display of concentrated lines increases. By increasing the number, the player can more easily recognize that the second ready-to-win performance is finished and the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the effect production according to the present invention is exemplified as a display of concentrated lines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The output of a specific sound effect from 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as effect effects, and the second reach effect ( As the battle performance) progresses, the effect level of the effect performance is increased one after another (for example, increasing the range of motion of the movable body 32, increasing the volume of a specific sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, The vibration of the controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be vibrated, etc.).

In addition, as shown in Figure 9-26 (G), Figure 9-29 (E), Figure 9-30 (D), Figure 9-31 (G), and Figure 9-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect. When the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden and the first display area 079SG005F is displayed. Since the image of the jackpot notification performance is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the visibility of the jackpot notification performance in the second display area 079SG005Sa is further increased, and the player is made aware that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. It's easy to do.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, when executing the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. In a state where the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the first In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed overlappingly with the first pending storage display area 079SG005D, the second pending storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T).

At this time, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made transparent or displayed in a reduced size, or the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U are displayed in a reduced size. The visibility of the jackpot notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the pending displays displayed in the pending display area.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-28 and 9-29, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, while the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, As shown in FIG. 9-21, during the execution period of the still image display effect, the rotating display of the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and Since the moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, it is possible that a suspended display is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect, or that the telop is being displayed moving. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the pending display, and by stopping the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the caption, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the pending display and the display of the caption. .

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 9-16 and 9-29(A) to 9-29(B), when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being performed by inverting the color of the still image.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as a form of changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as a still image display effect, a form of inverting the color of the still image was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Examples of ways to change the color of a still image include, but are not limited to, changing the color of a still image to black and white, changing only part of the color of a still image, and adding new colors to a still image. It may be added.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9-29(B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2, Since the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the colors of the fourth symbol displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not reversed, the player can see what is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. By comparing the hold display, telop, fourth symbol, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

In addition, in each variable display of the super reach in this feature part 079SG, there is a pattern in which the first reach effect or the third reach effect is executed and then the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect is executed, and a pattern in which the first reach effect or the third reach effect is executed. There is a pattern in which the variable display ends after the execution of the performance, transitioning to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance, so the display of the reach performance video progresses during the first reach performance or third reach performance. Whether or not to move to the second reach performance or fourth reach performance after being executed at speed V2, and display of the performance video of the reach performance during the second reach performance or third reach performance are executed at progress speed V2 Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the player is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled after the game is played, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in Figures 9-19, 9-20, 9-21, 9-23, 9-24, and 9-25, during the first reach performance and the third reach performance, the The production in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character during the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance and the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance are performed at the same time. Since it is executed at speed V1, the progress speed when transitioning from the first half execution period of the first reach performance to the second half execution period of the first reach performance or from the first half execution period of the third reach performance to the second half execution period of the third reach performance is different from the progress speed of the performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character during the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance, thereby excessively increasing the expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. You can prevent this from happening. Furthermore, Figure 9-18, Figure 9-20, Figure 9-22, Figure 9-24, Figure 9-25 and Figure 9-26 (E) to Figure 9-26 (G), Figure 9-29 (C) ~ Figure 9-29 (E), Figure 9-30 (B) ~ Figure 9-30 (D), Figure 9-31 (E) ~ Figure 9-31 (G), Figure 9-35 (A) ~ Figure As shown in 9-35(C), in the jackpot notification performance of this feature section 079SG, while displaying a video when an enemy character collapses due to a hit by an attack of an ally character is executed at a progress speed of V2, Figures 9-19, 9-21, 9-23, 9-25, 9-27 (E) to 9-27 (G), 9-30 (F) to 9-30 (H) ), as shown in Figures 9-32 (E) to 9-32 (G), and Figures 9-35 (D) to 9-35 (F), in the failure notification effect, a video is displayed when an ally character falls down. is displayed at the progress speed V1, so when the loss notification effect is executed, the display of the effect video of the loss notification effect is not executed at the progress speed V2, which may cause player dissatisfaction. It can also be prevented from becoming excessively high, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the variable display result of super reach is a failure notification effect is executed, the display of the effect animation of the failure notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a part of the variable display of the super reach, the presentation animation of the loss notification presentation may be displayed at a progress speed V2 that is slower than V1. By doing this, it is possible to create variations in the performance of the failure notification performance and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which the progress speed V1 of the performance video during the jackpot notification performance is the third speed in the present invention, and the progression speed V2 of the performance video during the jackpot notification performance is the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-24 and 9-25, the operation promotion effect is executed when the video of the reach effect is being displayed at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach effect. Therefore, the performance effect of the fourth reach performance can be enhanced by the operation promotion performance.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the display of the effect video of the fourth reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 while the operation promotion effect is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. During execution of the operation promotion performance, the display of the performance video of the fourth ready-to-reach performance may be performed at the progress speed V1. Furthermore, it is possible to execute a suggestion performance that suggests that the operation promotion performance will be executed before the operation promotion performance is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestion performance, the performance video of the fourth reach performance is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may also be executed.

In addition, as an operation promotion effect of the feature section 079SG, in addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M that notifies the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is now displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. While these operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or operation promotion image 079SG005Bb and meter 079SG005M are displayed, the display of the fourth reach effect animation at the progress speed V2 is continued, but the notification effect does not progress. . Furthermore, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. With this, the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect is executed. Therefore, the notification effect is not executed at a timing before the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends (until the operation promotion effect ends), so if the push button is not operated by the player, the notification effect is It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled during the operation reception period of the push button 31B.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, although the embodiment in which the detection means in the present invention is the push button 31B is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means may be a stick controller 31A or the like other than the push button 31B. In addition to the operation means described above, sensors capable of detecting the player's actions, such as a motion sensor or a touch sensor, may be used.

Also, Figures 9-18, 9-20, 9-22, 9-24, 9-26 (E) to 9-26 (G), 9-29 (C) to 9-29 (E), Figure 9-30 (B) to Figure 9-30 (D), Figure 9-31 (E) to Figure 9-31 (G), Figure 9-35 (A) to Figure 9-35C). As shown, in the jackpot notification performance in this feature section 079SG, the video of the part where the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the video of the part where the enemy character collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. will be displayed at In contrast, Figure 9-19, Figure 9-21, Figure 9-23, Figure 9-25, Figure 9-27 (E) to Figure 9-27 (G), Figure 9-30 (E) to Figure 9- 30 (G), Figures 9-32 (E) to 9-32 (G), and Figures 9-35 (D) to 9-35 (F), the deviation notification effect of this feature part 079SG is The moving image is displayed at the advancing speed V1, and is never displayed at the advancing speed V2. In other words, when a jackpot notification performance is executed, a part of the performance video of the jackpot notification performance is displayed at the progress speed V2, thereby giving the player the impression that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. can.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot in the present invention, a still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (a still image display effect in which colors are reversed). Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted as a still image display effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is used as a special effect in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is , effects other than the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow color, etc.) may be possible.

In addition, the operation promotion effect of this feature part 079SG is pattern SS-1 in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and a pattern SS-1 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. This can be executed in any of the performance patterns including pattern SS-2 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, which is larger in size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, is displayed as the operation promotion image. When the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be viewed through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while in pattern SS-2 When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, so the operation promotion effect is more difficult than when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. The visibility of the battle performance of 4 reach performance is low. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 9-17, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot is the same as when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the variable display result is lower than the rate of hitting a jackpot, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2 is used to perform the operation promotion performance, thereby improving the interest in the game. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 9-24, 9-25, and 9-33 (C) to 9-33 (E), when displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba as an operation promotion effect, the operation promotion image While displaying 079SG005Ba, the display of the animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb changes the progress speed V2 (slow motion ), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion performance is pattern SS. -2, in addition to displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, by displaying a dedicated background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5, the production video (battle (direction) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period in which the 4th reach performance video (battle performance) is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to the operation promotion performance pattern SS-2, the 4th reach performance video (battle performance) The display may be performed at the progress speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in this feature section 079SG, as super reach effects, a second reach effect can be executed after the first reach effect, and a fourth reach effect can be executed after the third reach effect. Furthermore, as the variable display of super reach, there is a variable display of super reach α1 that notifies the jackpot after the first half execution period of the first reach effect, and a variable display of super reach β1 that notifies the jackpot after the first half execution period of the third reach effect. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the second half execution period of the first reach performance after the first half execution period of the first reach performance and informs of the failure, and the second half of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance Variable display of super reach β2 that executes a partial execution period and informs of failure, variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the second reach effect after the first reach effect exchange partial execution period, third reach effect exchange partial execution period It is possible to perform a variable display of Super Reach α3 that transitions to the 4th Reach performance after , and as shown in Figures 9-18 to 9-25, from the execution period of the first half of the 1st Reach performance to the latter half of the 1st Reach performance. When transitioning to the execution period, When transitioning from the first half of the first reach performance to the first half of the second reach performance, When transitioning from the first half of the third reach performance to the second half of the third reach performance , when transitioning from the second half execution period of the third reach performance to the first half execution period of the fourth reach performance, the performance video of each reach performance is executed at the progress speed V2, and from the first half execution period of the first reach performance to the first half execution period. When transitioning to the execution period of the second half of the reach performance, when transitioning from the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance to the execution period of the first half of the second reach performance, from the execution period of the first half of the third reach performance to the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance When transitioning from the second half execution period of the third reach performance to the first half execution period of the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods. Therefore, when transitioning from the first half part execution period of the first reach performance to the second half execution period of the first reach performance, when transitioning from the second half execution period of the first reach performance to the first half execution period of the second reach performance, the third reach performance When transitioning from the execution period of the first half of the performance to the second half of the third reach performance, and when transitioning from the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the first half of the fourth reach performance, the player is given a sense of discomfort. You can prevent it from getting stuck. Furthermore, by displaying the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect at the progress speed V2, it is possible to easily recognize the branching of the ready-to-win effect drawn by the player.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach of this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which two reach effects can be executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display of super reach, three or more reach effects can be executed. It may be possible to perform a reach effect, or it may be possible to perform only one reach effect.

Although the characteristic portion 079SG of the present invention has been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature section 079SG, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are provided as reach effects for super reach, and in all of these reach effects, a part of the effect video of the reach effect is provided. Although a mode in which the display is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion) has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. A pattern in which the effect video is always displayed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the effect video is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Furthermore, the content of the effect may be different between a ready-to-win effect in which a part of the effect video is displayed at the progress speed V2 and a ready-to-reach effect in which the display of the effect video is not performed at the progress speed V2. By doing this, it is possible to create variations in the reach performance of the super reach, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is always played at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether or not the presentation video is being displayed at the progress speed V2. Although the output format is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example 079SG-1, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are shown. In the first half of the execution period of the second half of each reach performance, the playback speed V4 is set from speakers 8L and 8R as in the first half execution period of each reach performance of 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance. While the production sound is output in V4, in the second half (slow motion period) of the execution period of the second half of each reach performance of the 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance, The effect sound may be output at a different playback speed (for example, playback speed V5 slower than V4). By doing this, the performance effect of the performance sound for the reach performance can be improved by varying the playback speed of the performance sound while the display of the performance video for the reach performance is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the performance effect of the performance sound for the reach performance can be improved. You can improve your interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-33 and 9-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visible during the execution period of the reach effect by displaying the effect image 079SG005E, displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, etc. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, as shown in FIGS. 9-36 and 9-37, after the reach effect ends, , the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-36(A) to 9-36(D), when the second reach effect is being executed, when the second reach effect is finished together with the still image display effect, As part of the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), the results are shown in FIGS. 9-36(E) and 9-36(F). As such, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot game state will be controlled as a jackpot notification performance, or that the jackpot game state will not be controlled as a loss notification performance.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 9-37(A) to 9-37(D), when the fourth reach effect is being executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player presses the push button 31B. When the operation promotion effect ends without operating the button 31B, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as part of the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the second display. The image is enlarged and displayed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), the results are shown in FIGS. 9-37(E) and 9-37(F). As such, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot game state will be controlled as a jackpot notification performance, or that the jackpot game state will not be controlled as a loss notification performance.

Note that the effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 9-36 and 9-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. 9-3(B), and the drawing range is expanded as an image based on the image data 2. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce only the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F without reducing the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

In this way, in this modified example 079SG-2, while the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, as shown in FIGS. 9-36 and 9-37, After the end of the reach effect or the end of the fourth reach effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F as part of the notification effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is reduced. does not change, so by changing the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the timing of the notification effect, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb changes. By not changing, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the pending display, telop display, variable display of the fourth symbol, etc.

Furthermore, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image that is drawn as an image of the second image data shown in FIG. The visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by being enlarged toward the display area 079SG005Sb. It is possible to accurately reduce only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F, and the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by being executed toward the area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be made difficult to change.

Furthermore, although this modified example 079SG-2 exemplifies a form in which the operation promotion performance is executed during the fourth reach performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion performance is part of the notification performance. It may be executed as a part.

In addition, when performing the operation promotion effect as a part of the notification effect, as shown in FIGS. 9-38(A) to 9-38(F) as a modified example 079SG-3, it is similar to the modified example 079SG-2. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 9-38(D). do.

Note that by displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG. 9-2(A), it is possible to avoid a decrease in visibility due to the effect image 079SG005Ea.

Thereafter, the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the player operating the push button 31B, or the operation promotion performance is completed without the player operating the push button 31B, or the jackpot gaming state It is reported that the system is not controlled.

As described above, in this modified example 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced due to the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data Since the visibility of the push button 31B does not decrease, the operation promotion effect can be made more prominent than the fourth ready-to-reach effect, and the player can be effectively urged to operate the push button 31B.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the variable display result is always a jackpot, but the present invention The invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example No. 079SG-4, if the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always It may be possible to have a variable probability jackpot (or even a variable probability jackpot A that is most advantageous for the player). Furthermore, as a performance pattern when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state again after the loss notification performance is executed once. It may also be possible to perform a revival effect that notifies the user of the situation. In addition, in the case where the revival effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the jackpot type will be a variable jackpot or a non-probable variable jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot). There may be a case where the game is controlled to a jackpot game state and a case where it is controlled to a jackpot game state of variable jackpot. By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot notification effect will be executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. .

In addition, in the characteristic section 079SG, a message indicating the gaming status is displayed as an example of the telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this. The displayed telop may include a message indicating whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to a jackpot game state, the title of the reach effect being executed, etc. good.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, a mode is exemplified in which a caption can be displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T according to the state of the performance being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the caption display area 079SG005T The telops displayed are those that can identify the gaming status, the expectation level that the variable display result will be a jackpot in the variable display being executed (jackpot expectation level), explanation of the performance being executed (especially the reach performance), and the reach performance. It may also be a preview performance that can be executed from a timing earlier than the above.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-33 and 9-34, during the period when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the operation promotion effect (operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion The display of image 079SG005Bb) has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is executed after the moving image of the reach effect returns from the progress speed V2 to the progress speed V1. Good too.

Furthermore, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-33 and 9-34, an example is given in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed on the image display device 5 as the operation promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect includes not only simply displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, but also displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. As a pre-display effect, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of each push button 31B are displayed overlappingly, thereby creating an operation promotion image. An effect may be performed in which 079SG005Ba or operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed.

In addition, when performing the effect in which the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5 as a precursor effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5. The moving display speed may be reduced as the image approaches the center of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation promotion effect will be executed, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-20, 9-21, 9-24, and 9-25, when displaying the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although a mode is illustrated in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (emission colors) of the game effect lamp 9 is different from when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. It's okay. For example, when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in multiple colors, while the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. When playing, the game effect lamp 9 may be able to emit light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the moving image of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the game interest from decreasing due to the emitted light color of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-20, 9-21, 9-24, and 9-25, when displaying the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although a mode is illustrated in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the moving image of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be made longer. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the display of the moving image of the reach effect and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-26, 9-29, 9-30, 9-31, and 9-35, the performance mode of the jackpot notification performance includes the end of the reach performance. Later, an example is shown in which the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination that indicates a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination that indicates a jackpot. The timing may be during the reach performance.

Furthermore, the present invention provides a gaming machine in which a player can select at least part of the effect sounds such as BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. May be applied to By doing this, if the player has set the output of the effect sound that matches his/her preference, when the video of each reach effect is being displayed at the progress speed V1, the speaker 8L , the effect sound output from 8R remains unchanged and is played back at the playback speed V4, so even though the player himself has selected the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the effect sound is played back at the playback speed V4. It is also possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to slow playback.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as an end suggestion performance in the present invention, it is possible to execute a performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance, and the performance Although we have exemplified a form in which the variable display result always fails when executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. After the effect in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is temporarily switched to the display of the normal background image before the reach effect, and then the variable display result shows that the jackpot is achieved. (For example, a case where a revival effect is performed) may be provided.

In addition, when performing the resurrection effect in this way, the game effect lamp 9 is lit and flashed before the animation of the resurrection effect is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the resurrection effect is displayed to the player. It may be made to recognize that it will be executed. Further, as a presentation mode of the resurrection presentation, for example, the ally character may attack the enemy character again and defeat the enemy character. In particular, when performing a resurrection effect, a part of the video of the resurrection effect (for example, a video of a scene where an enemy character collapses) is displayed at a progress speed of V2 to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. Good too.

Further, although a plurality of characteristic parts and modifications are disclosed in this specification, the gaming machine of the present invention can be implemented by combining two or more of these plurality of characteristic parts and modifications. You may.

For example, the pachinko game machine 1 of the feature section 079SG may be a pachinko game machine in which the jackpot probability can be changed by changing setting values as shown in FIGS. 1 to 9. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display results are out of order, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to a high setting value (for example, 6) that is advantageous to the player. is set, even if the variable display results are off in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in pachinko game machine 1. good. By doing this, the fact that the variable display result is off in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 can be used as a suggestion that a high setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, in the variable display of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach β1, it is possible to suppress the decrease in player's interest due to the variable display result being wrong, and to draw the attention of the players to the fact that the variable display result is wrong. It becomes possible.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game machine that plays a predetermined game is defined as a game machine that plays at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs the following.

As described above, the feature section 079SG includes the following inventions.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A performance execution means (for example, Production control CPU 120),
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM and sound effects are output at the normal playback speed of V4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable.

Note that the configuration shown in the feature section 079SG can be configured in appropriate combination with the configuration shown in the feature section 090IW. For example, in the configuration shown in characteristic part 090IW, when executing a development effect that suggests that the time will be shortened when a small hit A or B occurs, the video before development (the first half) is The moving image after development (second half) is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1, and the video after development (second half) is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2. , 8R can output BGM, performance sounds, etc. at V4, which is the normal playback speed (same speed). Further, it is possible to display the moving image on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2 in the super reach before the development effect.

1... Pachinko game machine 2... Game board 3... Game machine frame 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize opening 11... Main board 12... Performance control board 13... Audio control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23...Count switch 30...Ball operating handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Microcomputer for game control 101, 121...ROM
102, 122...RAM
103...CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123...Display control section

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
The specific display result includes a first specific display result and a second specific display result different from the first specific display result,
sound output means;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
a variable means capable of controlling a first state in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter;
Equipped with
The variable means can be controlled to the first state by different control patterns when the first specific display result is derived and displayed and when the second specific display result is derived and displayed,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state;
The display means includes a first display area and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area,
The specific performance is
The display means displays a performance video, the sound output means outputs performance sound, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is announced as a performance result. including,
The performance execution means is
In the first display area, the effect video can be displayed,
In the second display area, information regarding the game can be displayed;
In the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed in the first display area,
In the second period,
The information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area,
After displaying the effect video progressing at the second speed, it is possible to perform a still effect of displaying a still image of the effect video,
There are multiple production modes of the static production,
Depending on which presentation mode the static presentation is, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs,
The performance execution means is
The information display can be displayed in an operative manner,
Continuing the information display operation even during the execution of the static performance,
In the third period,
When notifying an advantageous aspect as a performance result, the first display area and the second display area are used to inform the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period. It is possible to notify the performance results in an advantageous manner,
When notifying a disadvantageous aspect as a performance result, the first display area is used to notify the disadvantageous performance result while the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period is displayed. It is possible and
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means may be emitted at shorter intervals than in the first period. A gaming machine that allows the mode of light emission to be changed.

Images